Psion Teklogix PX750 User manual

NEO Hand-Held Computer
(Model No. PX750)
May 16, 2010
ISO 9001 Certified
Quality Management System
Part No. 8100157.B
This user manual supports Model Numbers:
- PX750BT
- PX750BT8
- FCC ID: GM3PX750BT and GM3PX750BT8
© Copyright 2010 by Psion Teklogix Inc., Mississauga, Ontario
2100 Meadowvale Boulevard, Mississauga, Ontario, Canada L5N 7J9
http:\\www.psionteklogix.com
This document and the information it contains is the property of Psion Teklogix Inc., is
issued in strict confidence, and is not to be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, except
for the sole purpose of promoting the sale of Psion Teklogix manufactured goods and services. Furthermore, this document is not to be used as a basis for design, manufacture, or
sub-contract, or in any manner detrimental to the interests of Psion Teklogix Inc.
Windows® and the Windows Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and any use of such trademarks by Psion Teklogix Inc. is under license.
All trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
Return-To-Factory Warranty
Psion Teklogix Inc. provides a return to factory warranty on this product for a period of
twelve (12) months in accordance with the Statement of Limited Warranty and Limitation of
Liability provided at www.psionteklogix.com/warranty. (If you are not already a member of
Teknet and you attempt to view this warranty, you will be asked to register. As a member of
Teknet, you will have access to helpful information about your Psion Teklogix products at
no charge to you.) In some regions, this warranty may exceed this period. Please contact
your local Psion Teklogix office for details. The warranty on Psion Teklogix manufactured
equipment does not extend to any product that has been tampered with, altered, or repaired
by any person other than an employee of an authorized Psion Teklogix service organization.
See Psion Teklogix terms and conditions of sale for full details.
Psion Teklogix warranties take effect on the date of shipment.
Disclaimer
Every effort has been made to make this material complete, accurate, and up-to-date. In addition, changes are periodically added to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated into new editions of the publication.
Psion Teklogix Inc. reserves the right to make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this document without notice, and shall not be responsible for any damages, including but not limited to consequential damages, caused by
reliance on the material presented, including but not limited to typographical errors.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.1
1.2
1.3
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Text Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
NEO Hand-Held Computer Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
2.1
Preparing NEO for Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.1.1 The Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.1.1.1 Charging the Main Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.1.2 Backup Battery Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2
Switching NEO On and Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2.1 Installing the Battery and Switching the Unit On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2.2 Switching the Unit Off (Suspend) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.3
2.4
Calibrating the Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Wireless Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.4.1 Status Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.4.2 Wi-Fi Config Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.4.2.1 Authentication Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
2.4.2.2 EAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.4.2.3 Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.4.2.4 Connecting the Wireless Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.4.3 Configuring TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.4.3.1 IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.4.3.2 Name Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.4.4 Advanced Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.5
2.6
Checking the Scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Data Transfer Between the PC and the Hand-Held . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.6.1 Using Microsoft ActiveSync®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.6.2 Using Windows Mobile Device Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
2.7
Resetting NEO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.7.1 Performing A Warm Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.7.2 Performing A Cold Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
i
Contents
Chapter 3: Getting To Know NEO
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Features of NEO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.2.1 Battery Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.2.2 Removing the Battery Pack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.2.2.1 Battery Swap Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.2.3 Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.2.3.1 Charging Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Switching the Hand-Held On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
The Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.4.1 Modifier Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.4.1.1 Activating Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.4.1.2 Locking Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.4.2 The Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.4.3 Function Keys and Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.4.3.1 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.4.3.2 The Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.4.4 48-Key Alpha-Numeric Keyboard: Accessing Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.4.5 26-Key Keyboard: Accessing Alpha Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.4.6 The Keyboard Backlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.5
The Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.5.1 Adjusting the Display Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.5.2 Calibrating the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.6
NEO Hand-Held Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.6.1 LED Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.6.2 Audio Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.6.2.1 Adjusting the Receiver Volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.6.3 Onscreen Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.7
Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing Run Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.7.1 Storing Batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.8
3.9
Uploading Data in a Docking Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Bluetooth Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.9.1 Pairing a Bluetooth Headset or Other Bluetooth Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.10 The microSD Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.10.1 Inserting the Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.11 General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.11.1 Caring For The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.11.2 Cleaning NEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
ii
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Contents
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0
4.1
Navigating in Windows CE 5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.1.1 Navigating Using a Touchscreen and Stylus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.1.2 Navigating Using the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
4.2
4.3
Working with Files, Folders and Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
The Startup Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
4.3.1 The Desktop Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
4.3.2 The Taskbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
4.3.2.1 Using the Taskbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.3.2.2 Customizing the Taskbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
The Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
4.4.1 The Desktop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
4.4.2 Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4.4.3 Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.4.4 Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
4.4.5 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.4.6 Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.4.7 Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.4
4.5
Using a Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Chapter 5: Configuration
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
Remote Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
The TekTerm Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
The Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Control Panel Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
5.5.1 Display Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
5.5.1.1 Display Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
5.5.1.2 Display Appearance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
5.5.2 Keyboard Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
5.5.2.1 Key Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
5.5.2.2 Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
5.5.2.3 Keyboard Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
5.5.2.4 Keyboard One Shot Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
5.5.2.5 Keyboard Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
5.5.2.6 Unicode Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
5.5.2.7 Scancode Remapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
5.5.2.8 Lock Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
5.5.3 Volume and Sound Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
iii
Contents
5.5.4
5.5.5
5.5.6
5.5.7
5.5.3.1 Volume Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
5.5.3.2 Sound Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Power Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
5.5.4.1 Battery Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5.5.4.2 Power Saving Suspend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5.5.4.3 Suspend Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
5.5.4.4 Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.5.4.5 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5.5.4.6 Built-in Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Stylus Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5.5.5.1 Double-Tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.5.5.2 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.5.5.3 Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Manage Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.5.6.1 Trigger Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.5.6.2 Add and Edit Trigger Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Certificate Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
5.6
Bluetooth Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
5.6.1 Paired Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
5.6.2 Device Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
5.6.2.1 Discovering and Removing Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
5.6.2.2 Filtering By Class of Device (COD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
5.6.2.3 Device Pop-up Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
5.6.2.4 Pairing a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
5.6.3 Servers Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
5.6.4 Mode Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
5.6.5 About Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
5.6.6 Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
5.7
Total Recall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
5.7.1 Creating a Backup Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
5.7.2 Restoring a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
5.7.3 Viewing a Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
5.7.4 Deleting a Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
5.8
The Storage Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
5.8.1 Formatting a Memory Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
5.8.2 Creating Partitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
5.8.3 Partition Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
5.9 IPv6 Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
5.10 TweakIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
iv
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Contents
5.10.1 Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
5.10.1.1 CE Services Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
5.10.1.2 Interface and Network Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
5.10.1.3 Services Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
5.10.1.4 Radio Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
5.10.2 User. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
5.10.2.1 Internet Explorer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
5.10.2.2 User Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
5.10.2.3 User System Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
5.10.3 Registry Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
5.11 Error Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
5.12 Dr. Debug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
5.12.1 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
5.12.2 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
5.12.3 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
5.13 Teklogix Imagers Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
5.13.1 Imager Demo Applet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
5.14 Teklogix Scanner Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
5.14.1 Bar Codes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
5.14.1.1 Scanner Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
5.14.1.2 Restoring Default Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
5.14.2 Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
5.14.2.1 Double Click Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
5.14.2.2 Display Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
5.14.2.3 Data Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
5.14.3 Translations Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
5.14.3.1 Case Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
6.1
Carrying Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
6.1.1 Attaching The Hand Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
6.1.2 Belt Clip Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
6.1.3 The Expansion Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
6.1.4 The Pistol Grip With Stylus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
6.2
6.3
The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Adaptor/Cable Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
6.3.1 RS-232 Adaptor – Model No. PX3050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
6.3.2 Micro-USB Adaptor – Model No. PX3054 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
6.4
Charging Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
v
Contents
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
Installation – Docking Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Power Consumption Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
6.5
Desktop Docking Station – PX3001. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
6.5.1 Desktop Docking Station Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
6.5.2 Charging A Battery Installed In NEO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
6.5.3 Charging a Spare Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
6.5.4 Battery Charge Duration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
6.5.5 Docking Station Charger LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
6.5.6 Troubleshooting the Charging Operation of The Dock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
6.5.6.1 Indicator Solid Red. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
6.5.6.2 NEO Power LED Does Not Light Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
6.5.6.3 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
6.5.7 Linking NEO to a PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
6.5.8 Linking NEO to an Ethernet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
6.5.8.1 Network Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
6.5.9 Troubleshooting USB Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
6.6
6.7
6.8
AC Wall Adaptor– Model No. PX3012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Cigarette Lighter Adaptor — Model PX3056 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Quad Docking Station – PX3004 PC & PX3004 NPC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
6.8.1 Quad Docking Station Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
6.8.2 Quad Docking Station Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
6.8.3 Inserting NEO in the Quad Docking Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
6.8.4 Network Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
6.8.4.1 Network Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
6.8.5 Battery Charging – LED Behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
6.8.6 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
6.8.6.1 Network Link Unsuccessful . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
6.8.6.2 NEO LED Does Not Light When Docked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Scanners and Imagers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
6.9.1 Basic Scanner Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
6.9.2 Scanning Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
6.9.3 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
6.9
6.10 Bluetooth Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Chapter 7: Specifications
7.1
vi
NEO Hand-Held Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
7.1.1 Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
7.1.2 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Contents
7.1.3
7.1.4
Wireless Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Bar Code Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
7.2
NEO Radio Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
7.2.1 802.11b/g Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
7.2.2 Bluetooth Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
7.3
Scanner/Imager Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
7.3.1 SE 955HP Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
7.3.1.1 SE 955HP Decode Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
7.3.2 EV15 Imager Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
7.3.2.1 EV15 Imager Decode Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
7.3.3 HHP 5000 Imager Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
7.3.3.1 HHP 5000 Decode Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Appendix A: Pinouts
A.1
A.2
A.3
Docking Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Battery Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Expansion Port Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Appendix B: Wireless Zero Config
B.1
B.2
Wireless Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
Assigning an IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-6
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
C.1
C.2
Decoded (Internal) Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1
Decoded (ISCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
D.1
D.2
D.3
D.4
D.5
Required Applets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Using the Teklogix Imagers Applet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Configuring the Bar Code Decoding Camera Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
Bar Code Symbologies – Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-20
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
vii
INTRODUCTION
1
1.1 About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Text Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3 NEO Hand-Held Computer Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
1
Chapter 1: Introduction
About This Manual
1.1
About This Manual
This manual describes how to configure, operate and maintain NEO, a light-weight, versatile hand-held computer.
Chapter 1: Introduction
provides a basic overview of NEO.
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
describes the steps required to get NEO ready for operation, including setting up the
802.11b/g radio.
Chapter 3: Getting To Know NEO
describes NEO features and outlines how to charge and maintain the battery. This chapter
also provides a description of the keyboards, how to navigate in Microsoft Windows CE 5.0,
and so on.
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0
describes the Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 desktop and how to use it. This chapter also outlines the basics of moving around a Windows CE 5.0 window, selecting and opening icons,
files, folders and working with a Windows dialog box.
Chapter 5: Configuration
describes the Windows CE 5.0 Control Panel and how to use it to configure NEO.
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
describes the peripherals and accessories available for NEO.
Chapter 7: Specifications
lists hand-held, radio, scanner and battery specifications.
Appendix A: Pinouts
describes NEO pinouts.
Appendix B: Wireless Zero Config
outlines the steps used to configure your radio using Windows Zero Config.
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
describes symbologies available with the Teklogix Scanners applet.
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
explains how to use the Teklogix Imagers applet.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
3
Chapter 1: Introduction
Text Conventions
1.2
Text Conventions
Note: Notes highlight additional helpful information.
Important: These statements provide particularly important instructions or additional
information that is critical to the operation of the equipment.
Warning: These statements provide critical information that may prevent physical
injury, equipment damage or data loss.
1.3
NEO Hand-Held Computer Features
Important: For all safety, regulatory and warranty information, refer to the “NEO
Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide”, PN 8000175.
NEO is a compact, ruggedized hand-held computer running the Microsoft Windows CE 5.0
operating system. It is intended for use in commercial and light industrial applications. NEO
can be ordered with or without a radio. Without a Wi-Fi radio, it operates as a batch or unconnected computer. With a Wi-Fi radio installed, NEO operates as a connected computer,
delivering real time wireless data transactions. A number of 1D bar code input methodologies are supported by the scanner and imager available with this hand-held computer.
Optimization for specific operational environments is supported with a wide range of peripheral options and carrying accessories.
The unique tilted screen design on this hand-held computer makes the display content
readily visible. This means that the operator can scan a bar code and view the results on the
display in one movement – no need to manually tilt the unit to view the results after each
scan. In addition, the tilted screen in conjunction with the protective rib at the base of the
keyboard allows the unit to be placed facedown safely with no danger of an accidental
key press.
Note: For complete NEO hand-held computer specifications, refer to “Specifications” on
page 167.
4
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 1: Introduction
NEO Hand-Held Computer Features
Figure 1.1 NEO Hand-Held Computer - Numeric & Alpha-Numeric
Model Variants
Connected NEO Standard Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
2.7 inch Colour Touchscreen
Windows® CE 5.0 Professional
microSD slot
3300 mAh Battery
Discrete VoIP (Push-To-Talk)
WiFi and Bluetooth Radios
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
5
Chapter 1: Introduction
NEO Hand-Held Computer Features
Additional Connected Options:
•
•
•
•
1D Imager
1D Laser Scanner
2D Imager
Keyboard Variants: 48-Key Alpha-Numeric or 26-Key Numeric
Batch NEO Standard Features:
•
•
•
•
2.7 inch Colour Touchscreen
Windows® CE 5.0 Core
microSD Slot
3300 mAh Battery
Additional Batch Options:
•
•
•
•
•
Bluetooth Radio
Bluetooth Radio and 1D Imager
Bluetooth Radio and 1D Laser Scanner
Bluetooth Radio and 2D Imager
Keyboard Variants: 48-Key Alpha-Numeric or 26-Key Numeric
Platform
•
•
Processor: PXA270 Processor @ 624 or 312 MHz
Memory:
- On-board RAM: 128 MB
- On-board ROM: 128 MB Flash
Operating System
•
•
Microsoft® Windows® CE 5.0 Core
Microsoft® Windows® CE 5.0 Professional
Programming Environment
•
•
HTML, XML
Mobile Devices SDK
- HTML, XML
- CE.NET SDK:
- Java™
6
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 1: Introduction
NEO Hand-Held Computer Features
- Visual Studio® 2008
- Standard protocol APIs – Windows® sockets (WinCE)
Wireless Communications
•
•
On-board IEEE 802.11b/g (CCX Certified)
On-board Bluetooth radio (10 metre range)
Application Software
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Internet Explorer® 6 for CE
Wordpad
ActiveSync
Open TekTerm
ANSI
TESS terminal emulations
IBM 3270, IBM 5250, HP 2392
MCC
Naurtech
Stay-Linked
PTX Connect
MCL
Bar Code Applications
•
•
•
1D Standard Laser Scanner Option – SE955
1D Standard Imager Option – EV15
2D Imager Option – HHP 5000
Internal Expansion Slots
•
One microSD slot
Expansion Port
•
•
•
Battery Output Power
USB Signalling
Scanner Trigger Input
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
7
Chapter 1: Introduction
NEO Hand-Held Computer Features
Docking Port
•
•
•
RS-232
USB
DC Input
Power Management
•
•
•
•
•
•
3.7 V @ 3300 mAh lithium-ion rechargeable battery
10 hour battery operation at 5 scans, transmit and receive per minute
Built-in gas gauge and performance monitor
System backup (up to 10 minutes) during battery swap
3 day real time clock backup
Adjustable battery allocation between system backup and runtime
Accessories
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
8
Desktop charger
Quad charger
Pistol grip
Holster
Hand Strap
Shoulder Strap
Additional miscellaneous adaptors and cables (a complete list of accessories is available
at www.psionteklogix.com
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
2
BASIC CHECKOUT
2.1 Preparing NEO for Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.1 The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.1.1 Charging the Main Battery . . . . . . .
2.1.2 Backup Battery Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Switching NEO On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 Installing the Battery and Switching the Unit On
2.2.2 Switching the Unit Off (Suspend) . . . . . . . .
2.3 Calibrating the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
11
11
11
11
11
12
12
2.4 Wireless Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.1 Status Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2 Wi-Fi Config Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2.1 Authentication Modes. . . . . . .
2.4.2.2 EAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2.3 Encryption. . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2.4 Connecting the Wireless Network
2.4.3 Configuring TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3.1 IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3.2 Name Server. . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.4 Advanced Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5 Checking the Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
19
21
22
23
2.6 Data Transfer Between the PC and the Hand-Held
2.6.1 Using Microsoft ActiveSync® . . . . . .
2.6.2 Using Windows Mobile Device Center .
2.7 Resetting NEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.1 Performing A Warm Reset . . . . . . . .
2.7.2 Performing A Cold Reset. . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
23
23
24
24
24
24
.
.
.
.
.
.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
9
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Preparing NEO for Operation
2.1
Preparing NEO for Operation
2.1.1
The Battery
NEO is powered with a 3300 mAh lithium-ion battery, Model No. WA3006.
Warning: Before charging the battery, it is critical that you review the safety guidelines
in the ‘NEO Hand-Held Computer (Model No. PX750) Regulatory &
Warranty Guide’, PN 8000175.
2.1.1.1 Charging the Main Battery
Battery packs shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40% and must be fully
charged prior to use. Batteries can be charged using a variety of docking stations along with
a NEO internal charger. When using the internal charger, a suitable power source is required.
All docking stations are described in Chapter 6: “Peripheral Devices & Accessories” beginning on page 155.
Note: In order to maintain the NEO real time clock for three days, a battery must be
charged for at least two hours while installed in the hand-held; however, if you are
charging a spare battery (not installed in the hand-held), the real time clock three
day backup cannot be maintained until a charged battery is installed in the handheld computer for at least two hours.
2.1.2
Backup Battery Power
A super capacitor provides a minimum of 10 minutes of suspend mode backup power to
NEO to protect data while you swap in a new battery; all unnecessary draws on power such
as the display and CPU are shut down to preserve power.
Important: When you initially power up the hand-held, leave the battery in the unit for a
minimum of 2 minutes to allow the super capacitor to reach full capacity.
2.2
Switching NEO On and Off
2.2.1
Installing the Battery and Switching the Unit On
•
•
Push the release latch at the base of the battery cover to unlatch it. Remove the
battery cover.
Insert a charged battery into the unit, making certain that the connectors on the battery
are aligned with those in the NEO’s battery compartment.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
11
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Switching the Unit Off (Suspend)
•
Replace the battery cover, and snap it into place.
Note: If you are using a docking station or an external power supply, you can insert an
uncharged battery and switch NEO on.
To switch NEO on:
• Press and hold down the [ENTER] key for at least one second.
• When the LED flashes green, release the [ENTER] button.
The desktop screen is displayed.
Note: If the unit was already in use – the unit may be off (suspend state) – pressing
[ENTER] ‘wakes’ the unit from this state. The screen in which you were working
prior to the suspend state is displayed.
2.2.2
Switching the Unit Off (Suspend)
•
2.3
Press the [FN/BLUE] key, and then press [ENTER].
Calibrating the Touchscreen
Note: Keep in mind that the touchscreen function can be turned off (see “Touch” on
page 97).
The touchscreen is factory-calibrated and ready-to-go; however, over time the touchscreen
operating parameters may change, and may need to be recalibrated for correct operation.
Refer to “Calibrating the Touchscreen” on page 36 for details.
2.4
Wireless Networking
NEO contains an integrated 802.11b/g radio module. The Wi-Fi Config application is used
to configure NEO for one or more wireless network profiles. A network profile contains settings for SSID (Service Set Identifier) and security options.
Note: In most situations, the configuration of your 802.11 radio will require parameter setting and access keys from a network administrator.
12
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Status Tab
To launch the Wi-Fi Config application:
•
Tap on Start>Programs>Wi-Fi Config.
The Wi-Fi Config screen is displayed.
2.4.1
Status Tab
The Status tab displays information about the wireless network to which NEO is configured
to connect. When there are no network profiles configured, this tab is not populated.
Disable/Enable Radio: This button toggles between Disable Radio and Enable Radio depending on whether the radio is turned off or on.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
13
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Wi-Fi Config Tab
2.4.2
Wi-Fi Config Tab
•
To configure the radio for a wireless network, tap on the Configure tab.
Connect: Used to connect to an already existing wireless network configuration.
Add New: Used to create a new wireless network configuration.
Edit: Used to change values in an already existing wireless network configuration.
Remove: Used to delete a wireless network configuration.
Scan: Used to detect and list available wireless networks. You can highlight a network
in the list, and tap on Add New to activate the network.
There are two methods available when configuring a radio network – you can either scan for
an existing network or manually create a network. If you tap on the Scan button, a list of
networks detected by the radio is displayed. Highlighting one of the listed networks and
tapping on the Add New button creates a new profile that is completed based on the security
capabilities detected by the radio. You may need to add additional information, depending
on your network requirements.
If you tap on the Add New button rather than the Scan button, you can create a
network manually.
Important: The steps below describe how to manually create a network. Keep in mind
that this is intended only as an example and may vary from your own
network requirements. If, for example, you are using a different type of security for your network, the fields you complete may not match those described
here.
14
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Wi-Fi Config Tab
•
Enter the SSID (Service Set Identifier) for your network.
2.4.2.1 Authentication Modes
NEO supports four classes of authentication – Open, WEP, WPA PSK and 802.1x with EAP.
Tapping on the Auth. Mode menu displays your authentication options.
Note: Each Auth. Mode has a unique Configure Profile screen attached to it with fields
appropriate to the authorization mode you’ve chosen.
Open Authentication
Open authentication does not provide security. When this option is chosen, NEO will
connect to wireless networks which do not use authentication or encryption.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
15
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Wi-Fi Config Tab
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)
WEP provides static security to prevent others from accidentally accessing your network. If
you choose this option, you can specify the type of WEP authentication – Open or Shared,
the WEP security key length – 64 bit or 128 bit and the key type – ASCII or Hex. WEP Key
fields are also provided where you can specify a 5 or 13 ASCII character sequence or an
equivalent 10 or 26 Hexadecimal digit sequence that matches the active WEP key on the
access point.
WPA & WPA2 Personal PSK (Pre-Shared Key)
When PSK is selected, either WPA Personal PSK or WPA2 Personal PSK – a shared key
must be configured on both the access point and the hand-held computer. One of the following can be chosen from the Encryption dropdown menu: TKIP, AES or TKIP+AES.
802.1X, WPA & WPA2 Enterprise and CCKM
These authentication modes use 802.1X and with EAP authentication. When 802.1X is selected, NEO uses WEP encryption with automatic (as opposed to static) keying. For the
others, the user may choose TKIP, AES or TKIP+AES encryption.
2.4.2.2 EAP
This menu allows you to choose the EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) type used for
802.1x authentication to an access point.
The following EAP types are supported by Wi-Fi Config:
•
16
TLS: Provides strong security via the use of client certificates for user authentication.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Wi-Fi Config Tab
•
•
•
•
PEAPv0-MSCHAPv2: Provides secure user authentication by using a TLS tunnel to
encrypt EAP traffic. MSCHAPv2 is used as the inner authentication method. This is
appropriate for use against Windows Active Directory and domains.
PEAP-GTC: PEAP authentication using GTC as the inner method which utilizes one
time passwords (OTPs) for authentication against OTP data bases such as SecureID.
LEAP: Is an authentication method for use with Cisco WLAN access points. LEAP
does not require the use of server or client certificates. LEAP supports Windows Active
Directory and domains but requires the use of strong passwords to avoid vulnerability to
off-line dictionary attacks.
FAST-MSCHAPv2: Is a successor to LEAP and does not require strong passwords to
protect against off-line dictionary attacks. Like LEAP, EAP-FAST does not require the
use of server or client certificates and supports Windows Active Directory and domains.
Server Certificate Verification
When the Verify Server Certificate box is checked, NEO will verify the certificate provided
by the authentication server during the authentication process. This requires that an appropriate certificate be manually installed on NEO for the verification.
2.4.2.3 Encryption
The Encryption menu allows you to choose the type of encryption that will be used to
protect transmitted data. Choose an Encryption method valid for your network from the
drop-down menu. Only the Encryption options that are compatible with the type of Auth.
Mode you’ve chosen will be listed. In fact, in some cases, this menu will not be available at
all.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
17
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Wi-Fi Config Tab
•
•
Complete the fields in the Configure Profile screen. If you’re uncertain about some of
the options, your system administrator will be able to provide the correct information
for your wireless network.
Once you’ve completed the necessary fields, tap on OK.
2.4.2.4 Connecting the Wireless Network
Your configured network is listed in the Configure tab. An [X] next to a network indicates
that this is the network to which NEO will connect.
• Tap on the Connect button to activate your network.
The Status tab is displayed. The Status field displays ASSOCIATING while the 802.11b/g
radio attempts to connect to the network. Once the association is complete, the Status tab is
populated with the appropriate information about your network.
18
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Configuring TCP/IP
2.4.3
Configuring TCP/IP
If your network is not using a DHCP server, you will need to assign an IP address.
2.4.3.1 IP Address
To assign an IP address for NEO:
•
Tap on the radio icon in the taskbar,
or
Tap on Start>Settings>Network and Dial-up Connections. Tap on the radio icon for
which you want to assign an IP address – in the sample screen below, the icon is labelled
SDIO86861.
The Wireless Statistics screen is displayed.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
19
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Configuring TCP/IP
•
Tap on the IP Information tab.
Figure 2.1 SDIO86861 IP Information Tab
Note: When DHCP is enabled, tapping the ‘Renew’ button forces NEO to renew or find a
new IP address. This is useful if, for example, you are out of communication range
for a longer period of time and your hand-held is dropped from the network.
To define a static IP address:
20
•
Tap on the Configure button.
•
•
Tap the stylus on the radio button next to Specify an IP address to select it.
Type an IP, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway address in the appropriate fields. Press
[ENTER] to save your information.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Configuring TCP/IP
2.4.3.2 Name Server
Note: If DHCP is enabled, name server addresses are assigned automatically.
•
•
In the SDIO86861 IP Information tab (see Figure 2.1 on page 20), tap on the
Configure button.
Tap on the Name Servers tab.
The DNS and WINS fields in the Name Servers tab allow you to specify additional WINS
and DNS resolvers. The format for these fields is ###.###.###.###.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
21
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Advanced Tab
2.4.4
Advanced Tab
If you prefer to use Wireless Zero Config, the Windows native supplicant, to configure the
radio:
•
Tap on the Advanced tab, and tap on the checkbox to the left of Use Windows to configure my wireless settings to add a check mark and activate this option.
Tap here to add a checkmark
to activate the Windows radio
configuration.
•
•
You’ll need to reset NEO. Choose Start>Shutdown>Warm Reset.
A dialog box is displayed letting you know that you will lose all unsaved data. Tap on
OK.
Once the reset is complete, the Wireless Zero Config screen is displayed on NEO. Refer to
Appendix B: “Wireless Zero Config” for details.
22
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Checking the Scanner
2.5
Checking the Scanner
If your hand-held is equipped with an internal scanner, you can test it to ensure that it is operating properly. Point the scanner window at a bar code that your scanner was designed to
decode. Press the SCAN key or the pistol trigger, and check for a valid decode on the handheld screen.
Performance is improved if you disable all unneeded bar codes in the Bar Codes screen.
Review “Teklogix Scanner Settings” on page 135 or details about bar codes.
2.6
Data Transfer Between the PC and the Hand-Held
Data transfer options vary slightly depending on the type of operating system installed in
your PC. Microsoft® ActiveSync® is PC connectivity software that can be used to connect
your hand-held to PCs running this software. ActiveSync works only with the Windows XP
SP2 operating system or earlier.
If the Microsoft Vista or Windows 7 operating system is installed in your PC, ActiveSync is
not required to transfer data between NEO and your PC.
By connecting NEO to a PC with a cable, you can:
•
•
•
2.6.1
View NEO files from Windows Explorer.
Drag and drop files between NEO and the PC in the same way that you would between
PC drives.
Back up NEO files to the PC, then restore them from the PC to the hand-held again, if
needed, and so on.
Using Microsoft ActiveSync®
If you are using Windows XP or earlier, your data transfers require Active Sync. To install
ActiveSync, follow the step-by-step instructions provided with the program’s setup wizard.
Refer to the following website for details:
http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/activesync/activesync45.mspx
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
23
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Using Windows Mobile Device Center
2.6.2
Using Windows Mobile Device Center
If you are running Windows Vista or Windows 7, your data transfers do not require ActiveSync. Instead, you will need to download Windows Mobile Device Center. Refer to the
instructions at the following website
http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/en-us/downloads/microsoft/device-center-download.mspx
To transfer data between your PC and your hand-held:
•
•
Tap on Start>Computer to display the drives. NEO will be visible here.
Open drives, files and folders as you would on your PC.
2.7
Resetting NEO
2.7.1
Performing A Warm Reset
When you perform a warm reset, the operating system restarts without clearing the object
store memory where the file system resides. Registry settings, installed programs and any
data files are preserved. Any open applications are closed and any unsaved data are lost.
To execute a warm reset:
•
Press and hold down the [FN/BLUE] key and the [ENTER] key simultaneously for a
minimum of six seconds.
Note: You do not need to reset NEO after configuring the radio.
2.7.2
Performing A Cold Reset
Note: Cold reset is only listed in the Shutdown menu if the security level of the hand-held is
set to Supervisor or Teklogix.
A cold reset clears the object store memory and restarts the operating system. Registry settings are maintained, but any data and applications that are not stored in the Flash file system
– called Flash Disk on NEO – or on a microSD card are lost. This should be used as a last
resort if NEO cannot be reset using any other method.
To execute a cold reset and launch the Windows CE 5.0 operating system (bypassing the
boot menu):
•
24
Press and hold down the [FN/BLUE] [FN/ORANGE] and [ENTER] keys simultaneously for a minimum of six seconds.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
3
GETTING TO KNOW NEO
3.1 Features of NEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.2 The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1 Battery Safety . . . . . . .
3.2.2 Removing the Battery Pack
3.2.2.1 Battery Swap Time
3.2.3 Charging the Battery . . . .
3.2.3.1 Charging Options .
3.3 Switching the Hand-Held On and Off
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
28
28
29
29
29
29
30
3.4 The Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1 Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1.1 Activating Modifier Keys . . . . .
3.4.1.2 Locking Modifier Keys . . . . . .
3.4.2 The Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3 Function Keys and Macro Keys . . . . . .
3.4.3.1 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3.2 The Macro Keys. . . . . . . . . .
3.4.5 26-Key Keyboard: Accessing Alpha Keys.
3.4.6 The Keyboard Backlight . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 The Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1 Adjusting the Display Backlight . . . . . .
3.5.2 Calibrating the Touchscreen . . . . . . . .
3.6 NEO Hand-Held Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1 LED Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.2 Audio Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.2.1 Adjusting the Receiver Volume . .
3.6.3 Onscreen Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing Run Time .
3.7.1 Storing Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8 Uploading Data in a Docking Station . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
31
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
36
36
36
36
37
37
38
39
39
41
42
43
3.9 Bluetooth Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
25
3.9.1 Pairing a Bluetooth Headset or Other Bluetooth Device
3.10 The microSD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10.1 Inserting the Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11 General Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11.1 Caring For The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11.2 Cleaning NEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 43
. 46
. 46
. 47
. 47
. 48
3.1
Features of NEO
Figure 3.1 Front View
LED
(Light Emitting Diode)
Receiver
Microphone
Protective Rib
Chapter 3: Getting To Know NEO
The Battery
Figure 3.2 Back View
Scanner/Imager
Pistol Grip
Attachment Slot
Pistol Grip
Attachment Slot
Accessory
Attachment Insert
Accessory
Attachment Insert
Docking Port
Beeper
Expansion Port
Cover
Battery Cover &
microSD Card
Compartment
BOTTOM OF NEO
Accessory Attachment
Point
Battery Latch
3.2
Accessory Attachment Point
BACK OF NEO
Battery Door Detection Magnet
(inside battery cover)
The Battery
The hand-held operates with a lithium-ion battery, Model No. WA3006. Preparing the unit
for operation requires that a battery pack be charged and installed in NEO.
3.2.1
Battery Safety
Important: Before attempting to install, use or charge the battery pack, it is critical that
you review and follow the important safety guidelines in NEO Hand-Held
Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide, PN 8000175.
28
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 3: Getting To Know NEO
Removing the Battery Pack
3.2.2
Removing the Battery Pack
Important: To protect against data loss, NEO is equipped with a sensor; this sensor
detects when the battery door is opened and automatically places the handheld computer into suspend mode so that you can safely remove the battery.
For details about unlatching the battery cover, review “Installing the Battery and Switching
the Unit On” on page 11.
3.2.2.1 Battery Swap Time
Assuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not been altered, battery swap time is 10 minutes – you will not lose data if the battery is replaced
within this time frame.
The Suspend Threshold adjustment in the Power Properties tab allows you to determine the
battery capacity at which the hand-held will be shut down. If left at the default value,
Maximum Operating Time, the unit will run until the battery is completely empty; the RAM
is only backed up for a short period of time. If you choose Maximum Backup Time, the handheld shuts off with more energy left in the battery so RAM can be backed up for a longer
period of time.
Refer to “Suspend Threshold” on page 94 for details about reserving battery power for data
backup purposes.
3.2.3
Charging the Battery
Batteries shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40% of capacity. They must
be fully charged prior to use.
3.2.3.1 Charging Options
Important: FOR DETAILED INFORMATION about charging options, refer to
Chapter 6: “Peripheral Devices & Accessories”.
Lithium-ion batteries must be charged before use. These batteries can be charged with a
variety of adaptors and docking stations. These include:
•
AC Wall Adaptor (Model No. PX3012) – operates as an AC power source and when
used in conjunction with PX3001 or PX3054, also charges the battery installed in
the unit.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
29
Chapter 3: Getting To Know NEO
Switching the Hand-Held On and Off
•
Cigarette Lighter Adaptor (Model No. PX3056) when used with a USB/DC Power
Adaptor (Model No. PX3054).
• Desktop Docking Station (Model # PX3001) – operates as both a charger and a docking
station. Operating as a charger, both the battery installed in the hand-held and a spare
battery can be charged simultaneously.
• Desktop Docking Station with Integrated V.92 Analog Modem (Model No. PX3008) –
integrates docking and analog modem functionality. Operating as a charger, both the
battery installed in the hand-held and a spare battery can be charged simultaneously.
Operating as a modem, this dock provides USB connectivity and data connections over
a PSTN line.
• Quad Docking Station – (Model # PX3004) can charge the battery of up to four NEOs
inserted in the docking station.
The charge time required to make NEO ready for use varies depending on the type of
docking station used. A hand-held inserted in a docking station requires 3 hours to charge
the battery to 75% capacity. NEO is equipped with an intelligent charging system that protects the battery from over-charging by terminating the charge process when the battery is at
maximum capacity.
Note: The specified battery charge times are based on the hand-held in suspend mode.
Additional peripherals and other power consumption features will alter the specified
charge time.
Note: Refer to “Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing Run Time” on page 41 for additional information about the battery.
Important: To avoid damaging the battery, the charge process will not begin until the
battery temperature is between 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F).
3.3
Switching the Hand-Held On and Off
• To switch the unit on, press and hold down the [ENTER] key for at least one second.
• When the LED flashes green, release the [ENTER] key.
The startup screen is displayed.
Note: If NEO is in suspend state, pressing [ENTER] ‘wakes’ the unit from this state. The
screen in which you were working before the computer entered suspend state is
displayed.
30
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 3: Getting To Know NEO
The Keyboard
Switching Off NEO (Suspend)
Important: Keep in mind that turning off NEO does not result in a complete reboot;
rather, the unit enters a power-saving, “suspend” state. When the unit is
turned on from suspend state, operation resumes within a few seconds.
•
3.4
To switch the unit off, press [FN/BLUE] [ENTER].
The Keyboard
Two keyboard options are available:
• 48-key alpha-numeric keyboard
• 26-key numeric keyboard
These keyboard options are available for both variants of NEO – connected hand-helds
equipped with 802.11b/g radios and batch (unconnected) hand-helds not equipped with
802.11b/g radios.
Most of the keys on these keyboards operate much like a desktop computer. Where a key or
key function is not consistent with the PC keyboard, the differences are noted.
The [FN/BLUE] and [FN/ORANGE] modifier keys provide access to additional keys and
system functions. These functions are colour coded in orange and blue print on the
keyboard keys.
3.4.1
Modifier Keys
The [SHIFT], [CTRL], [ALT], [FN/BLUE] and [FN/ORANGE] keys are modifier keys.
Pressing a modifier key changes the function of the next key pressed.
The [SHIFT], [CTRL] and [ALT] keys operate much like a desktop keyboard except that
they are not chorded (two keys held down simultaneously). The modifier key must be
pressed first followed by the key whose function you want modified.
3.4.1.1 Activating Modifier Keys
When a modifier key is pressed once, it is displayed in lowercase letters in the taskbar at the
bottom of the hand-held screen. For example, if the [CTRL] key is pressed, ctrl key is displayed at the bottom of the unit screen. Once the next key is pressed, the modifier key
becomes inactive and disappears from the taskbar.
Keep in mind, however, that the ‘One Shot’ function allows you to determine how many key
presses will lock a modifier key ‘on’ – one press or two. Refer to “Keyboard One Shot
Modes” on page 83 for details.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
31
Chapter 3: Getting To Know NEO
The Keys
3.4.1.2 Locking Modifier Keys
When a modifier key is pressed twice, it is ‘locked’ on. A ‘locked’ modifier key is displayed
in uppercase letters in the taskbar. For example, pressing the [CTRL] key twice locks it on –
it is displayed as CTRL KEY in the taskbar at the bottom of the computer screen.
The locked modifier key will remain active until it is pressed a third time to unlock or turn it
off. Once a modifier key is unlocked, the uppercase representation at the bottom of the
screen is no longer displayed.
3.4.2
The Keys
The [SHIFT] Key
The [SHIFT] key provides access to uppercase alpha characters, and on numeric hand-helds,
it also provides access to the symbols displayed in white print on the keys.
To lock the keyboard into uppercase, CAPS-lock, press [FN/BLUE] followed by [SHIFT]. A
CAPS-lock icon – a blue capital letter A within a white box – appears in the taskbar. To
unlock or turn off CAPS-lock, press [FN/BLUE] [SHIFT] again. Refer to “Keyboard One
Shot Modes” on page 83 if you need to adjust the behaviour of this key.
The Arrow Keys
The Arrow keys move the cursor around the screen in the direction of the arrow: up, down,
left and right. The cursor is the flashing box or underline character that indicates where the
next character you type will appear.
The [SPACE] Key
Pressing this key inserts a blank space between characters. In a Windows dialog box, pressing the [SPACE] key enables or disables a checkbox.
The [<—/DEL] Key
This key allows access to both the backspace and the delete function. The backspace function represented by an arrow [<—] (sometimes referred to as destructive backspace) moves
the cursor one character to the left, erasing the incorrectly entered key stroke.
The delete function ([FN/BLUE] [<—/DEL]) erases the character at the cursor position.
The [CTRL] And [ALT] Key
The [CTRL] and [ALT] keys modify the function of the next key pressed and are application-dependent.
32
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 3: Getting To Know NEO
Function Keys and Macro Keys
The [TAB] Key
Typically, the [TAB] key moves the cursor to the next field to the right or downward.
The [ESC] Key
Generally, this key is used as a keyboard shortcut to close the current menu, dialog box or
activity and return to the previous one.
The Windows
[START] Key
This key displays the Start menu.
The [SCAN] Key
All units are equipped with a yellow [SCAN] key. For units that do not have internal scanners, this key can be re-mapped to another function.
Volume Keys - [UP ARROW] and [DOWN ARROW]
The volume keys are located on the [UP ARROW] and [DOWN ARROW]. The [UP
ARROW] key – the increase volume key – is labelled with a plus symbol
. The
[DOWN ARROW] key – the decrease volume key – is labelled with a minus symbol
.
Press the [FN/BLUE] key followed by the [UP ARROW] and/or [DOWN ARROW] keys to
adjust the volume.
Backlight Keys - [LEFT ARROW] and [RIGHT ARROW]
The backlight keys are located on the [LEFT ARROW] and [RIGHT ARROW] keys.
The [LEFT ARROW] key – the decrease backlight key – is labelled with a minus
symbol
. The [RIGHT ARROW] key – the increase backlight key – is labelled with a
plus symbol
.
Press the [FN/BLUE] key followed by the [LEFT ARROW] and [RIGHT ARROW] keys to
adjust the backlight.
3.4.3
Function Keys and Macro Keys
In addition to the standard keyboard functions, NEO supports Function keys and Macro
keys. All Function and Macro keys can be custom defined for each application.
3.4.3.1 Function Keys
The hand-held keyboard is equipped with a total of 10 function keys colour coded in blue
print on the numeric keys; these keys are accessed by executing a key combination,
[FN/BLUE] followed by the appropriate numeric key.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
33
Chapter 3: Getting To Know NEO
48-Key Alpha-Numeric Keyboard: Accessing Keys
Note: The [TAB], [ALT], [CTRL] and [ESC] keys have [F1] through [F4] printed on
them; these are only labels and are provided so that the operator can create directpress function keys using the keyboard remapping feature. Refer to “Scancode
Remapping” on page 84 for details about mapping keys.
For example, to access function key [F7]:
•
•
Press the [FN/BLUE] key followed by the [7] key – the numeric key to which function
key [F7] is mapped.
To access function key [F8], press [FN/BLUE] [8], and so on.
3.4.3.2 The Macro Keys
While macro keys are not physically stamped on the keyboard, up to 15 macro functions can
be added using the Scancode Remapping function. Refer to “Scancode Remapping” on
page 87 for details about mapping keys. Refer to “Keyboard Macro Keys” on page 84 for
details about programming characters in a Macro key.
3.4.4
48-Key Alpha-Numeric Keyboard: Accessing Keys
The alpha and numeric keys on an alpha-numeric keyboard are directly accessible from the
keyboard – no key combination is required.
3.4.5
26-Key Keyboard: Accessing Alpha Keys
On numeric 26-key keyboards, numeric keys are directly accessible, and all alpha characters
are printed on the keys in orange characters. An indicator in the left corner of the taskbar displays the currently selected character. To access an alpha character, first press the
[FN/ORANGE] key and then press the numeric key above which the alpha character you
want to type is printed.
Choosing a Single Alpha Character
The examples below illustrate how to access, A, B, and C, all of which are printed in orange
characters above the numeric key [2].
Important: The letters you choose appear in the taskbar, providing a visual indicator of
which letter will be displayed on the screen.
To choose the letter a:
•
34
Press the [FN/ORANGE] key, and press the numeric key [2].
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 3: Getting To Know NEO
26-Key Keyboard: Accessing Alpha Keys
Note: To choose the second, third or fourth alpha character assigned to a numeric key,
you may want to lock the [FN/ORANGE] key ‘on’. By default, the [FN/ORANGE]
key is locked ‘on’ when pressed once. However, depending on how your unit is set
up in the ‘One Shots’ tab, you may find that you need to press the [FN/ORANGE]
key twice to lock it ‘on’. Refer to “Keyboard One Shot Modes” on page 83
for details.
To choose the second letter in the sequence – in this example, the letter b:
•
Lock the [FN/ORANGE] key ‘on’. ‘ORG KEY is displayed in upper-case characters in
the taskbar to indicate that this key is locked ‘on’.
• Press numeric key [2] twice to display the letter b.
To choose the third letter in the sequence – in this example, the letter c:
•
•
Lock the [FN/ORANGE] key ‘on’.
Press numeric key [2] three times to display the letter c.
Note: Keep in mind that there is a timeout if you pause for one second between key presses
when selecting the second, third or fourth letters on a key. For example, suppose
you want to type the letter ‘c’ – you’d need to press the [2] key three times. With the
[FN/ORANGE] key locked ‘on’, if you press [2] twice and then pause between key
presses for 1 second, the letter ‘b’ will be selected automatically.
Creating Uppercase Letters
To display a capital letter:
•
Press the [FN/ORANGE] key and then the [SHIFT] key before typing the
alpha character.
Note: If you want to use uppercase characters at all times, press [FN/BLUE] [SHIFT]. An
icon of an uppercase ‘A’ is displayed in the taskbar indicating that all letters will be
displayed as uppercase characters.
Choosing Multiple Alpha Characters
• Lock the [FN/ORANGE] key ‘on’.
Each time you press a numeric key from [2] through [9], an alpha character will be displayed on the screen. Remember that you can refer to the softkey bar for a visual indication
of which alpha key will be displayed on the screen.
Important: Once you have finished typing alpha characters, remember to turn off or
unlock the [FN/ORANGE] key.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
35
Chapter 3: Getting To Know NEO
The Keyboard Backlight
3.4.6
The Keyboard Backlight
The intensity of the keyboard backlight and the conditions under which this backlight is activated can be configured using the Keyboard icon in the Windows CE 5.0 Control Panel.
The behaviour of the keyboard backlight is tailored in the Keyboard Properties dialog box.
Refer to “Keyboard Backlight” on page 82 for details about this option.
Note: Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only.
3.5
The Display
NEO hand-helds are equipped with display backlighting. The backlight switches on when a
key is pressed or the screen is tapped.
3.5.1
Adjusting the Display Backlight
The Display Properties dialog box in the Control Panel allows you to determine the behaviour of the display backlight and its intensity. Refer to “Display Backlight” on page 78 for
details about the Display Properties dialog box.
Note that you can also adjust the backlight directly from the keyboard by pressing the
[FN/BLUE] key followed and the [LEFT ARROW] and [RIGHT ARROW] arrow keys to
increase or decrease the backlight intensity.
3.5.2
Calibrating the Touchscreen
If NEO touchscreen has never been calibrated, or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item, use the Stylus Properties dialog box in the Control Panel to
recalibrate the screen.
•
36
In the Control Panel, choose the Stylus icon to display the Stylus Properties window.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 3: Getting To Know NEO
NEO Hand-Held Indicators
Figure 3.3 Stylus Icon
•
Choose the Calibration tab, and then tap on the Recalibrate button.
Figure 3.4 Calibration Screen
•
3.6
Follow the directions on the calibration screen to calibrate the screen.
NEO Hand-Held Indicators
NEO uses an LED (Light Emitting Diode), onscreen messages and audio tones to indicate
the various conditions of the hand-held, the batteries, the scans and so on.
3.6.1
LED Indicator
A tri-coloured LED – yellow, green or red – is located on the upper-left side of the unit,
above the screen.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
37
Chapter 3: Getting To Know NEO
Audio Indicators
Keep in mind that the application running on NEO can dictate how the LED operates.
Review the documentation provided with your application to determine LED behaviour.
The scanner also overrides LED behaviour. The table below describes what the various LED
colours indicator when a scan is activated – a scanner button is pressed or the scanner trigger
is pulled.
Table 3.1 NEO Scanner LED Behaviour
LED Behaviour
Scan Status
Solid Red
Indicates the scanner is firing.
Blinking Red
Unsuccessful decode.
Solid Green
Successful decode.
Note: During the first two minutes of a battery charge, the LED remains solid yellow
while the hand-held computer status is assessed.
If the unit is attached to an external power supply, the hand-held LED reflects the battery
charge status.
Table 3.2 NEO Charge LED Behaviour
LED Behaviour
3.6.2
Charge Status
Solid Yellow
Battery charged to less than 75% capacity.
Flashing Green
Battery charged to between 75% and 95% of capacity.
Solid Green
Fully charged.
Flashing Yellow
Temperature outside charge range (0°C to 45°C).
Solid Red
Battery is not charging. Battery fault warning.
Audio Indicators
The audio receiver provides a variety of sounds when a key is pressed, a keyboard character
is rejected, scan input is accepted or rejected, an operator’s entry does not match in a match
field or the battery is low. To specify how you want NEO to respond under various conditions, refer to “Volume and Sound Properties” on page 91.
38
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 3: Getting To Know NEO
Onscreen Indicators
The volume keys are located above the [UP ARROW] and [DOWN ARROW] keys. The increase volume key is labelled with a plus symbol
and the decrease volume key is
labelled with a minus symbol
.
3.6.2.1 Adjusting the Receiver Volume
•
•
3.6.3
Lock the [FN/BLUE] key ‘on’ and then, press [UP ARROW] – the increase volume key
or [DOWN ARROW] – the decrease volume key until the volume meets your
requirements.
Remember to press the [FN/BLUE] key again to turn it ‘off’.
Onscreen Indicators
The taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays a variety of system status indicators.
Figure 3.5 Taskbar
Note: This sample screen is present on units running ‘Windows CE 5.0 Professional; the
desktop screen for a ‘Batch’ NEO running ‘Windows CE 5.0 Core’ differs slightly
from the sample screen above; in the ‘Core’ version, the icons for Internet Explorer,
Wordpad and Remote Desktop are not visible.
The taskbar changes dynamically, and only those icons that are applicable are displayed. For
example, if a radio is not installed in NEO, the radio signal icon is not displayed in
the taskbar.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
39
Chapter 3: Getting To Know NEO
Onscreen Indicators
Windows® Start Button
If you are using the touchscreen, you can either tap the Windows icon at the bottom left of
the screen, or press [FN/BLUE] [.] (period) to display the Start Menu, and then tap on the
desired application.
Modifier Key Indicators
[SHIFT], [CTRL], [ALT], [FN/BLUE] and [FN/ORANGE] are modifier keys that when
pressed, are displayed in the taskbar to indicate that they are active. If a modifier key is
locked ‘on’, it is displayed in uppercase characters. For example, if the [FN/BLUE] key is
locked on, it is displayed as BLUE KEY in the taskbar. A locked modifier key remains
active until it is pressed again to unlock or turn it off.
If a modifier key has been pressed but is not locked on, it is displayed in the taskbar in lowercase characters – for example, blue key. It will remain active only until the next key is
pressed at which point, the modifier key is turned off.
Note: The locking function of the modifier keys can be set up so that pressing one of these
keys once will lock the key ‘on’. They can also be set up so that they must be pressed
twice to be locked ‘on’. Refer to “Keyboard One Shot Modes” on page 83
for details.
Battery Gauge
The battery shaped icon displayed in the taskbar provides a visual indication of the remaining battery power. The icon acts as a meter that is either full, at three-quarter level, half,
quarter level or empty.
When the battery level is low – approximately 15 minutes from empty – a warning window
pops up. When the battery power is completely depleted, a final warning window indicates
that NEO will be powered down.
If NEO is using external AC power, an AC icon is displayed in the taskbar.
Full
40
75%
50%
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
25%
Empty
AC Connection
Chapter 3: Getting To Know NEO
Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing Run Time
Battery Charge
The battery charge icon is displayed in the taskbar when the hand-held battery is being
charged.
802.11 Radio Signal Quality
Increasing radio signal quality is represented by longer, filled bars within this icon.
Good
Reception
Weak
Reception
No Radio
Link
Docking Device
When a hand-held is inserted in a docking station, an associated icon appears in the taskbar.
Bluetooth Radio
This icon displayed in the taskbar represents the installed Bluetooth radio.
Security Level
Security levels can be set to limit user access. In addition, applications can be restricted to
prevent inadvertent changes.
3.7
Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing Run Time
Note: The battery status is displayed in the Power applet in the Control Panel. A ‘very low
power’ warning message is displayed automatically if the battery capacity falls to
1%. You can also set the percentage at which a ‘low power’ message is displayed
using the Advanced tab in the Power Properties dialog box; it is set to 10% by
default. Refer to “Power Properties” on page 92 for details.
As lithium-ion batteries age, their capacity decreases gradually, and they are generally considered depleted after approximately 2 years of use (less than 60% of original capacity
remaining). Keep in mind however that heavy usage or operating the unit at temperature extremes will shorten the battery life.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
41
Chapter 3: Getting To Know NEO
Storing Batteries
Lithium-ion batteries do not require conditioning cycles and the NEO battery system does
not require user interaction to maintain peak performance.
To determine the remaining charge in the battery, you can tap on the Power icon in the
Control Panel to display a dialog box that provides detailed information about the battery
status of the main battery installed in your unit. You can also tap on the Power icon in the
taskbar to display the battery status.
To maximize the run time of your batteries, consider the following:
•
•
•
•
•
3.7.1
The hand-held is ‘event’ driven – that is, when the unit is not in use, it reverts to sleep
mode (even when it appears to be running), saving battery power. Events include a key
press, touchscreen taps and scan triggers. Power consumption is reduced if you avoid
unnecessary events, and allow the unit to sleep as much as possible.
To view the status of the main battery installed in your unit, tap on the Power icon in the
Control Panel to a dialog box that provides information about the battery status of the
main battery installed in your unit.
When the hand-held is switched off, it goes into a low-power, suspend state but continues to draw a small amount of power from the battery. This should not be an issue unless
the unit is left in suspend state for more than a week – for long-term storage, the battery
should be removed from the unit.
Reduce display brightness.
Turn off the keyboard backlight if not required.
Storing Batteries
Long term battery storage is not recommended. If storage is necessary:
•
•
•
•
•
42
Always try to use a ‘first-in first-out’ approach to minimize storage time.
Lithium-ion batteries age much faster at elevated temperatures. Store batteries at temperatures between 0 °C and 20 °C (32 °F and 68 °F).
Always charge batteries to at least 40 to 60% before storing them. Batteries can be
damaged by an over-discharge phenomenon that occurs when an empty battery is stored
for a long period of time such that the cell voltage drops below a lower limit.
To minimize storage degradation, recharge stored batteries to 40 to 60% every 4 or 6
months to prevent over-discharge damage.
A ‘never used’ lithium-ion battery that has been stored for 3 years may have limited or
no useful life remaining once put into service. Think of batteries as perishable goods.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 3: Getting To Know NEO
Uploading Data in a Docking Station
3.8
Uploading Data in a Docking Station
Important: Review the documentation provided with the user application installed in
NEO before performing data uploads.
The desktop docking station and quad docking station are typically used to upload transaction data to a server computer when a radio link is not available.
Note: Refer to “Desktop Docking Station – PX3001” on page 156 for more details.
The desktop docking station can complete batch uploads to a Client USB connected PC or
server. An optional 10/100 Base-T Ethernet connection can be used via the USB to Ethernet
cable (Model No. PX3052).
Unlike the desktop docking station, the quad docking station supports only TCP/IP connections to a PC or server through a 10/100 Base-T Ethernet connection.
When NEO is properly inserted in a docking station, a dock icon is displayed in the navigation bar at the top of the screen. The unit also detects the presence of the Ethernet network.
3.9
Bluetooth Radio
Note: Integrated Bluetooth Class 2 radios are standard on ‘connected’ NEOs – that is,
units equipped with 802.11 radios. On ‘batch’ (unconnected) units, Bluetooth is an
optional feature.
The Bluetooth radio enables short range data communication between devices. In addition,
it provides the capability to use a Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone as a data modem, exchanging information with other Bluetooth devices and providing network access. You can
also pair your hand-set with a Bluetooth headset. Refer to “Bluetooth Setup” on page 102
for setup details.
3.9.1
Pairing a Bluetooth Headset or Other Bluetooth Device
Note: If the Bluetooth radio is not already enabled, tap on the Start>Settings>Control
Panel. Tap on the Power icon and then, the Built-in Devices tab. Add a checkmark
next to Enable Bluetooth.
To pair a device:
•
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to place the remote device in pairing mode.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
43
Chapter 3: Getting To Know NEO
Pairing a Bluetooth Headset or Other Bluetooth Device
• Choose the Devices tab and Scan for devices in your area.
• When the scan is complete, tap on the device to which you want to pair.
• In the pop-up Device menu, tap on Pair.
An Authentication dialog box is displayed.
•
•
If the remote device has authentication enabled, type the PIN in this dialog box.
To proceed without authentication, tap on Next.
Note: If a remote device has authentication enabled and you’ve skipped the authentication
process, a pop-up screen will ask if you want to allow the remote device to connect to
NEO. Tap on Yes and type the PIN. When authentication is complete, tap on Done.
44
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 3: Getting To Know NEO
Pairing a Bluetooth Headset or Other Bluetooth Device
After entering the device PIN, the Services dialog appears with a list of services available for
that device.
• Click in the checkbox to the left of the service to activate it.
• Click on Done.
Services that require more information present a configuration dialog box. Serial Profile is
an example.
This dialog box offers a number of additional options such as enabling Encryption and selecting three different modes: Serial, ActiveSync and Scanner
•
•
Serial is used for simple serial port communication.
ActiveSync is for ActiveSync-over-Bluetooth.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
45
Chapter 3: Getting To Know NEO
The microSD Card
•
Scanner is used to create a seamless connection between the incoming Bluetooth bar
code and NEO.
Once you’ve completed the information:
•
3.10
Tap on Next and then in the Services screen, click on Done.
The microSD Card
A microSD card slot is available in the battery compartment. microSD cards provide additional, non-volatile memory to your hand-held.
3.10.1 Inserting the Card
•
•
•
•
Switch off NEO.
Remove the battery cover and the battery.
Gently slide the SD door down and then flip it forward.
Slide the microSD card onto the guides on the SD door – position the card with the connector pads at the bottom so that when the door is closed, they make contact with the
connectors in the unit.
Connector Pads On
microSD Card
microSD Door
(opened)
46
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 3: Getting To Know NEO
General Maintenance
•
3.11
Carefully flip the SD door down, and slide it upward to lock it in place. Do not force it.
General Maintenance
3.11.1 Caring For The Touchscreen
The top of the touchscreen is a thin, flexible polyester plastic sheet with a conductive
coating on the inside. The polyester can be permanently damaged by harsh chemicals and
is susceptible to abrasions and scratches. NEO is equipped with a stylus that is designed
to safely select items on the touchscreen. Use only the stylus on the touchscreen; using
sharp objects on the touchscreen can scratch or cut the plastic, or crack the internal
conductive coating.
The chemicals listed below must not come into contact with the touchscreen:
•
•
•
•
sodium hydroxide,
concentrated caustic solutions,
benzyl alcohol, and
concentrated acids.
Note: An optional protective cover (PN 1081366) is available to help protect the touchscreen. Follow the installation instructions shipped with the cover.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
47
Chapter 3: Getting To Know NEO
Cleaning NEO
3.11.2 Cleaning NEO
Important: Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent
to wipe the exterior of the unit clean.
•
•
•
•
48
Use only mild detergent or soapy water to clean the hand-held unit.
Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals. The plastic case is susceptible to
harsh chemicals; it is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and gasoline. The plastic
slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions.
To clean ink marks from the keyboard and touchscreen, use isopropyl alcohol.
When using a dampened cloth to clean NEO, make certain that the battery cover is in
place to protect the battery compartment from moisture.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
4
WORKING WITH WINDOWS CE 5.0
4.1 Navigating in Windows CE 5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.1 Navigating Using a Touchscreen and Stylus .
4.1.2 Navigating Using the Keyboard . . . . . . .
4.2 Working with Files, Folders and Programs. . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
51
51
51
52
4.3 The Startup Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.1 The Desktop Icons . . . . . . . .
4.3.2 The Taskbar. . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.2.1 Using the Taskbar . . . .
4.3.2.2 Customizing the Taskbar
4.4 The Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.1 The Desktop . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.2 Security Settings . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3 Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.4 Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.5 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.6 Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.7 Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5 Using a Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
53
54
55
55
56
58
59
59
61
62
64
65
65
66
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
49
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0
Navigating in Windows CE 5.0
4.1
Navigating in Windows CE 5.0
Note: In order to access many of the menus discussed in this chapter, the security level
must be set to ‘Supervisor’ (see “Security Settings” on page 59).
Graphic user interfaces like Windows CE 5.0 for portable devices and desktop Windows
(2000, XP, etc.) utilize ‘point and click’ navigation. An equivalent keyboard shortcut is also
available for every ‘point and click’ action.
Windows CE 5.0 supports the same ‘point and click’ user interface and keyboard shortcuts
as desktop Windows with one difference – the ‘point and click’ action is accomplished using
a touchscreen rather than a mouse. Actions can be performed using any combination of keyboard shortcuts or touchscreen tapping.
4.1.1
Navigating Using a Touchscreen and Stylus
Note: If the touchscreen is not registering your screen taps accurately, the touchscreen
may need recalibration. Refer to “Calibrating the Touchscreen” on page 36.
NEO is equipped with a stylus – a pointing tool that looks like a pen. The stylus is used to
select objects on the touchscreen.
Note: To prevent damage to the touchscreen, use only the stylus (pen) supplied with
your NEO.
To choose an icon, open a file, launch an applet, or open a folder:
•
4.1.2
Double-tap the stylus on the appropriate icon.
Navigating Using the Keyboard
If the touchscreen has been disabled, you can use the keyboard to choose icons, navigate
dialog boxes, display the desktop, and so on. If your unit has already been fully configured
and your application is launched at startup, you’ll have little need for keyboard navigation,
but you can refer to Table 4.1 for a description of the navigation keys.
Table 4.1 Keyboard Navigation
Operation
Switch between active
applications
Open task manager
Key or Key Combination
[ALT] [TAB]
[ALT] [ESC]
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
51
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0
Working with Files, Folders and Programs
Table 4.1 Keyboard Navigation
Operation
Move the cursor
Open file, folder or icon
Exit & Save
Close/Exit & Do Not Save
Navigate Dialog Boxes
Key or Key Combination
Arrow keys
[ENTER]
[ENTER]
[ESC]
[TAB]
To move cursor up: [SHIFT] [TAB]
To display the contents of the next ‘tab’ in a dialog box:
[CTRL] [TAB]
Select/Deselect Radio Button & [SPACE]
Press Button
Go to Start Menu
[FN/BLUE][.] or [CTRL][ESC]
Keep in mind that unlike a desktop computer, NEO does not support key chording (pressing
two keys at the same time). You must press one key followed by the next in sequence. Refer
to Section 4.2: “Working with Files, Folders and Programs” for additional details about keyboard navigation.
4.2
Working with Files, Folders and Programs
Figure 4.1 Working with Windows Icons
Folder
Program Icon
File
52
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0
The Startup Desktop
•
Double-tap on the appropriate icon – either a folder icon, a program icon or a file icon –
to open or launch your selection.
If you’re using the keyboard:
•
•
4.3
Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon you want to open or launch.
Press [ENTER].
The Startup Desktop
When NEO boots up, the startup desktop (shell) is displayed. Any applications stored in the
Startup folder start up immediately.
Note: The startup folder is located in \Windows\StartUp and \Flash Disk\StartUp.
Figure 4.2 NEO Startup Desktop
To access desktop icons:
•
Double-tap on the icon to open a window or, in the case of an application icon, launch
an application.
On the keyboard:
•
Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon, and press [ENTER] to launch the
highlighted icon.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
53
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0
The Desktop Icons
Note: If the arrow keys do not highlight the desktop icons, the desktop may not be selected.
Press [FN/BLUE] [.] (period) to display the Start Menu, and select Desktop. Now
the desktop will be “in focus” and the arrow keys will highlight the icons.
4.3.1
The Desktop Icons
Note: NEOs equipped with the Windows CE 5.0 Core OS do not include Internet Explorer,
Wordpad or Remote Desktop.
The icons displayed in the startup desktop operate in much the same way as those displayed
on any standard PC desktop that is running Windows.
My Device
Choosing this icon displays the contents of NEO computer. If you’re not sure how to access
the files, folders and programs displayed, refer to “Working with Files, Folders and Programs” on page 52.
Recycle Bin
This option temporarily stores items that were deleted, allowing you to either permanently
delete or restore these items.
Internet Explorer
Choosing this icon launches Internet Explorer – a standard Windows CE 5.0 version. Keep
in mind that your supervisor will need to set up access using the Internet Options and the
Network and Dial-up Connections icons in the Control Panel.
Microsoft WordPad
Microsoft WordPad is a basic word processor used to create, edit, view and print text
documents.
Remote Desktop Connection
This option allows NEO to communicate with a remote desktop PC. “Remote Connect” on
page 73 provides a website with step-by-step instructions.
54
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0
The Taskbar
4.3.2
The Taskbar
NEO is equipped with a taskbar at the bottom of the screen. It displays icons through which
you can view the battery capacity and radio signal quality of your unit. If the hand-held is attached to a docking station or adaptor, an associated icon is displayed. In addition, the
taskbar displays the application(s) currently running on your unit and the security level assigned to NEO.
The taskbar also displays active modifier keys: [SHIFT], [ALT], [CTRL], [FN/BLUE] and
[FN/ORANGE]. Keys that have been locked “on” are displayed in uppercase letters. For example, if you have set the [CTRL] key Lock to “on” in the Keyboard menu and you press
the key, it is displayed as CTRL KEY in the taskbar. (For detailed information on modifier
keys and keyboard options, see “The Keyboard” on page 31).
4.3.2.1 Using the Taskbar
A tooltip is displayed as each taskbar icon is highlighted. The tooltip provides the status of
each icon.
If you’re using the touchscreen:
•
Tap and hold the stylus on an icon to display the associated tooltip. Double-tap the icon
to open the Control Panel dialog box associated with the icon. For example, double-tap
the battery icon to display a dialog box listing the current battery capacity information.
On the keyboard:
•
•
Press [FN/BLUE] [.] (period) to display the Start Menu.
Press the [DOWN] arrow key to highlight Shortcuts in the Start Menu, and then press
the [RIGHT] arrow key to display the sub-menu.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
55
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0
The Taskbar
•
•
•
Choose System Tray in the sub-menu.
Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon in the taskbar about which you’d like more
information.
Press [ENTER] to display the appropriate dialog box.
4.3.2.2 Customizing the Taskbar
To customize the taskbar so that it displays only those icons you require:
• In the Start Menu, choose Settings>Taskbar.
If you’re using the keyboard:
• Press [FN/BLUE] [.] to display the Start Menu.
• Highlight the Settings option, highlight Taskbar in the sub-menu, and press [ENTER].
The Taskbar and Start Menu dialog box is displayed.
Taskbar General Tab
•
Tap the stylus on the items you want to activate or deactivate. The check mark indicates
active items.
If you’re using the keyboard:
•
56
Highlight the options you want to activate, and press the [SPACE] key to select them.
The check mark indicates active items.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0
The Taskbar
Taskbar Advanced Tab
•
•
Tap on the Clear button to empty the Documents folder.
To display Control Panel applets in menu form rather than in a window, tap in the
checkbox next to Expand Control Panel.
Taskbar Security Tab
If you check Disable hot keys, the Application from Start menu field becomes enabled. Use
this field to enter the name of the application you want to run when the user presses the
Menu hot key: [FN/BLUE] [0].
If you have disabled hot keys, hidden the Start Menu and have no application configured,
the Menu hot key brings up the Security dialog box to allow authorized users to access the
hand-held configuration. Keep in mind that this dialog box is also displayed if an invalid application is entered in the Application from Start Menu field.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
57
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0
The Start Menu
4.4
The Start Menu
Note: Some of the Start Menu items may be disabled based on the current NEO
security settings.
The Start Menu lists the operations you can access and work with. It is available from the
startup desktop or from within any application.
To display the menu:
•
Tap on the Start Menu icon in the lower-left corner of the taskbar. Tap on the item with
which you want to work.
If you’re using the keyboard:
•
•
Press [FN/BLUE] [.] (period).
Use the arrow keys to highlight a menu item, and press [ENTER].
Note: If a ‘Start Menu’ item has an underlined character, you can type the underlined
alpha character to display the associated dialog box– for example, displaying the
‘Start Menu’ and then typing the letter ‘s’ displays the ‘Security’ dialog box.
58
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0
The Desktop
4.4.1
The Desktop
Choosing Desktop in the Start Menu displays NEO desktop.
4.4.2
Security Settings
Choosing the Security option from the Start Menu displays a dialog box in which you can
define the access level for NEO: Supervisor or User.
Figure 4.3 Security Levels
Assigning the Supervisor Security Level
The security level is represented by an icon in the shape of a lock in the taskbar. The security
levels define the options accessible to the operator in the Start Menu and the taskbar.
By default, the security level is set to User, restricting access to only the most basic Start
Menu items.
To allow access to all the Start Menu and taskbar options:
•
In the Security Level dialog box, tap on the radio button next to Supervisor.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
59
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0
Security Settings
•
•
In the Password field, type the Supervisor level password. The default password is
123456.
Tap on OK. You can now access all menu items in the Start Menu along with the icons
in the taskbar.
Changing a Password
Note: Keep in mind that this is the same password as that assigned through the Password
control panel applet. Refer to “Control Panel Icons” on page 74.
To assign a password:
• Choose a security level, and enter the existing password in the Password field.
• Tap on the Set Password button.
A dialog box labelled Password Properties is displayed.
•
•
Type the new password in the Password: text box (all keyboard characters are valid).
In the Confirm Password: text box, retype the new password.
Configuring Security
Choosing the Configure button displays the Configure Security dialog box.
This dialog box allows you to determine which security levels will have an associated icon
displayed in the taskbar. By default, a security icon is not displayed for user-level security.
Note: It is recommended that you enable ‘Allow Teklogix Security Level’ so that authorized Psion Teklogix service personnel can access your unit should it require
maintenance.
60
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0
Programs
4.4.3
Programs
•
Choose Start>Programs to display a sub-menu of options.
Figure 4.4 Programs Sub-Menu
Note: The sample Program menu above is for NEOs equipped with the Windows CE 5.0
Professional OS. NEOs equipped with the Windows CE 5.0 Core OS have a more
limited Program menu that includes only ActiveSync, Demo, Command Prompt and
Windows Explorer.
ActiveSync®
This option allows you to connect to another device using ActiveSync.
Demo
This folder contains the Demo Scanner, Demo Signature and Demo Sound applications.
Demo Scanner can be used to test how the hand-held reads and writes bar codes. Demo Signature allows you to capture a signature written on the screen with your stylus and save it to
a file. Demo Sound allows you to record and playback. The ‘Sample Rate’ and the ‘Bits Per
Sample’ are the rates at which the sound will be recorded. Sounds recorded at the higher
sample rate or bits per sample will be higher quality sound but will require more file storage
space. Lower sample rates and/or bits per sample produces a smaller file, but the sound
quality suffers. The record and play buttons operate in the same as on any recording device.
The X icon deletes the sound and the diskette icon allows you to save your sound.
Command Prompt
Command Prompt is used to access the DOS command prompt. At the prompt, you can type
DOS commands such as dir to display all the directories in the drive.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
61
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0
Shortcuts
Internet Explorer
NEO is equipped with Microsoft Internet Explorer for Windows CE 5.0. You can access the
Internet Options icon through the Start Menu under Settings>Control Panel or by doubletapping on the desktop Internet Explorer icon.
Microsoft WordPad
The Microsoft WordPad is a basic word processor used to create, edit, view and print text
documents.
Remote Connect
Remote Connect is a NEO application used to connect to a Windows Terminal Server so that
you can run a “session” on the Server machine using NEO (Windows CE 5.0 device).
“Remote Connect” on page 73 provides a website with details about this option.
Windows Explorer
The Windows Explorer installed on NEO is consistent with all Windows CE 5.0 devices.
You can access this option from the Start Menu under Programs> Windows Explorer.
4.4.4
Shortcuts
System Tray
If your touchscreen is not enabled, you can use the System Tray option to access the icons in
the taskbar at the bottom of the screen. The taskbar displays indicators such as a radio signal
icon and the security level. These indicators are attached to dialog boxes that provide additional information.
•
62
Choose Start>Shortcuts>System Tray.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0
Shortcuts
Using the icons in the taskbar, you can either display the Control Panel dialog box associated with an icon, or you can view a “tooltip”. A tooltip provides the status of each icon.
•
Tap and hold the stylus on an icon to display the icon’s tooltip. Double-tap on the icon to
open the Control Panel dialog box associated with the icon.
On the keyboard:
•
•
•
•
•
Press [FN/BLUE] [.] to display the Start Menu.
Choose Shortcuts from the Start Menu, and then press the [RIGHT] arrow key to
display the sub-menu.
Choose System Tray in the sub-menu.
Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon in the taskbar about which you’d like more
information. As each icon is highlighted, a tooltip is displayed.
To display the associated Control Panel dialog box, press [ENTER].
Cycle Tasks
When Cycle Tasks is selected (and the Task Manager is not open), you can cycle through
active applications.
To cycle through your active applications:
• Choose Shortcuts>Cycle Tasks, or
Press [ALT] [TAB].
Task Manager
The Task Manager allows you to switch to another task or to end an active task. To display
the task manager window:
• Tap on Shortcuts>Task Manager, or
Press [ALT] [ESC].
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
63
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0
Settings
Figure 4.5 Task Manager
4.4.5
Settings
The Settings sub-menu includes the following settings: Control Panel, Network and Dial-up
Connections, and Taskbar and Start Menu.
Figure 4.6 Settings Sub-Menu
Control Panel
The Control Panel contains applets used to configure hardware, the operating system and
the shell. If NEO is running with the Psion Teklogix TekTerm application or another application, additional configuration applets may appear in the Control Panel.
64
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0
Run
Network and Dial-Up Connections
The Network and Dial-up Connections window allows you to configure NEO radio or
execute an existing configuration. Refer to “Configuring The 802.11b/g Radio” on page 12
for radio setup details.
Taskbar and Start Menu
The Taskbar and Start Menu option displays a dialog box in which you can customize the
taskbar, choosing which options will be displayed. Refer to “Customizing the Taskbar” on
page 56 for additional details about this option.
4.4.6
Run
Choosing the Run option from the Start Menu displays a dialog box in which you can enter
the name of the program, folder or document you want to open or launch.
Figure 4.7 Run Dialog Box
4.4.7
Shutdown
The Shutdown menu includes these options: Suspend, Warm Reset and Cold Reset.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
65
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0
Using a Dialog Box
Figure 4.8 Shutdown Sub-Menu
Note: This menu varies slightly depending on the security level chosen. When NEO is set
to User level, the Shutdown option is replaced by Suspend. A sub-menu is
not available.
Suspend
The Suspend option suspends NEO immediately. This is equivalent to turning the handheld off.
Warm Reset
A Warm Reset preserves installed drivers and applications along with data that are saved in
the object store (Windows CE default file system).
Cold Reset
A Cold Reset preserves data and applications that are saved in the Flash file system, called
Flash Disk on NEO or on a microSD card. This should be used as a last resort if NEO
cannot be reset using any other method.
4.5
Using a Dialog Box
A dialog box (like the samples in Figure 4.9 on page 67) appears when you need to make selections and enter further information. You can move between dialog items by tapping on
them with your stylus, or by pressing the arrow keys and the [TAB] key ([SHIFT] [TAB]
moves the cursor backwards).
66
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0
Using a Dialog Box
Figure 4.9 Dialog Boxes
Tabs
Radio
Button
Textbox
Drop-down Menu
Checkbox
Button
Note: You can use the stylus to tap on an element in a dialog box to select or deselect it,
display drop-down menus, save your selections, and so on.
Dialog boxes contain one or more of the following elements:
Tab: A tab separates different elements of a dialog box. Press the [TAB] key until a tab in
the dialog box is highlighted. To display adjoining tabs, press the [RIGHT] or [LEFT] arrow
key. To display the information in the next tab from anywhere in the window, press
[CTRL] [TAB].
Textbox: A textbox requires that you type information. Press the [TAB] key to highlight the
textbox and then type the appropriate information.
Drop-down: This type of menu is identified by up and down arrows next to the drop-down
menu to indicate that additional options are available. Press the [TAB] key to highlight the
menu, and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to cycle through the options.
Checkbox: This box allows you to select or deselect an option. To select or deselect a
checkbox, press the [TAB] key to highlight the checkbox, and press the [SPACE] key to
select or deselect it.
Radio buttons: These buttons allow you to choose from a number of options. For example,
in the sample screen in Figure 4.9 on page 67 you can choose to Obtain an IP address via
DHCP or Specify an IP address. Press the [TAB] key to highlight a radio button option, and
then select a radio button by pressing the arrow keys to highlight the appropriate option.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
67
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0
Using a Dialog Box
Buttons: This type of button allows you to Save, Delete and so on the options you’ve chosen
in a dialog box. Use the [TAB] key to highlight the button you want to use. Press the
[ENTER] key to activate it.
Saving Your Choices: Once you’ve made all your changes, press the [ENTER] key to save
your changes and exit the window.
Note: A dialog box item that is displayed in grey text indicates that it is not
currently available.
68
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
5
CONFIGURATION
5.1 Remote Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5.2 The TekTerm Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5.3 The Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5.4 Control Panel Icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
5.5 Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.1 Display Properties . . . . . . . . .
5.5.1.1 Display Backlight . . . . .
5.5.1.2 Display Appearance . . . .
5.5.2 Keyboard Properties . . . . . . . .
5.5.2.1 Key Repeat . . . . . . . .
5.5.2.2 Sequence . . . . . . . . .
5.5.2.3 Keyboard Backlight . . . .
5.5.2.4 Keyboard One Shot Modes
5.5.2.5 Keyboard Macro Keys . .
5.5.2.6 Unicode Mapping . . . . .
5.5.2.7 Scancode Remapping . . .
5.5.2.8 Lock Sequence . . . . . .
5.5.3 Volume and Sound Properties . . .
5.5.3.1 Volume Adjustments . . .
5.5.3.2 Sound Adjustments . . . .
5.5.4 Power Properties . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.4.1 Battery Capacity. . . . . .
5.5.4.2 Power Saving Suspend . .
5.5.4.3 Suspend Threshold . . . .
5.5.4.4 Advanced . . . . . . . . .
5.5.4.5 Devices . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.4.6 Built-in Devices . . . . . .
5.5.5 Stylus Properties . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.5.1 Double-Tap . . . . . . . .
5.5.5.2 Calibration. . . . . . . . .
5.5.5.3 Touch . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.6 Manage Triggers . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.6.1 Trigger Mappings . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
78
78
78
79
80
80
81
82
83
84
86
87
90
91
91
92
92
93
93
94
95
96
96
96
97
97
97
98
98
69
5.5.6.2 Add and Edit Trigger Mapping . . .
5.5.7 Certificate Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6 Bluetooth Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.1 Paired Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.2 Device Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.2.1 Discovering and Removing Devices .
5.6.2.2 Filtering By Class of Device (COD) .
5.6.2.3 Device Pop-up Menu. . . . . . . . .
5.6.2.4 Pairing a Device . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.3 Servers Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.4 Mode Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.5 About Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.6 Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection . . . . . .
5.7 Total Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.1 Creating a Backup Profile . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.2 Restoring a Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.3 Viewing a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.4 Deleting a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8 The Storage Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.1 Formatting a Memory Card . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.2 Creating Partitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.3 Partition Management . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.9 IPv6 Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
100
102
102
103
105
105
106
106
107
109
110
110
111
115
116
119
119
120
121
121
122
123
125
5.10 TweakIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.10.1 Advanced. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.10.1.1 CE Services Settings . . . . . .
5.10.1.2 Interface and Network Settings .
5.10.1.3 Services Settings . . . . . . . .
5.10.1.4 Radio Features . . . . . . . . .
5.10.2 User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.10.2.1 Internet Explorer Settings. . . .
5.10.2.2 User Display Settings . . . . . .
5.10.2.3 User System Settings . . . . . .
5.10.3 Registry Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11 Error Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
125
126
126
127
128
128
129
129
130
130
131
131
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5.12 Dr. Debug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
70
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
5.12.1 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.12.2 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.12.3 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.13 Teklogix Imagers Settings. . . . . . . . . . .
5.13.1 Imager Demo Applet . . . . . . . .
5.14 Teklogix Scanner Settings. . . . . . . . . . .
5.14.1 Bar Codes Tab. . . . . . . . . . . .
5.14.1.1 Scanner Menu . . . . . . .
5.14.1.2 Restoring Default Settings .
5.14.2 Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.14.2.1 Double Click Parameters .
5.14.2.2 Display Parameters . . . .
5.14.2.3 Data Handling . . . . . . .
5.14.3 Translations Tab. . . . . . . . . . .
5.14.3.1 Case Rules . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.132
.132
.133
.133
.134
.135
.135
.135
.136
.137
.137
.138
.139
.140
.141
71
Chapter 5: Configuration
Remote Connect
5.1
Remote Connect
Remote Desktop Connection is a Windows application that allows you to connect to a computer across the Internet using NEO (Windows CE device). Refer to the following website
for step-by-step information about setting up this connection:
http://www.microsoft.com/windowsxp/using/mobility/getstarted/remoteintro.mspx
or contact Psion Teklogix support services. (Refer to the NEO Regulatory & Warranty
Guide, PN 8000175, or locate the office closest to you at www.psionteklogix.com)
5.2
The TekTerm Application
TekTerm is a powerful emulation application ideally suited for real time data transaction applications associated with mainframes and servers. NEO includes unique features that
support TekTerm – a Psion Teklogix application that has the ability to maintain multiple simultaneous sessions with a variety of host computers. For detailed information, please refer
to the TekTerm Software User Manual, PN 8000073.
5.3
The Control Panel
The Windows CE 5.0 Control Panel provides a group of icons through which you can set a
variety of system-wide properties, such as mouse sensitivity, network configuration and the
desktop color scheme.
Note: If you are uncertain how to move around a dialog box and make selections,
review “Using a Dialog Box” on page 66.
When NEO boots up, the startup desktop (shell) is displayed, and any applications stored in
the Startup folder start up immediately.
To access the Control Panel:
• Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel.
If you’re using the keyboard:
•
•
Press [FN/BLUE] [.] to display the Start Menu.
Highlight Settings in Start Menu, and press the [RIGHT] arrow key to highlight the
Control Panel.
• Press the [ENTER] key.
The Control Panel folder contains icons used in the setup of NEO.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
73
Chapter 5: Configuration
Control Panel Icons
Figure 5.1 Control Panel
5.4
Control Panel Icons
The Control Panel provides a group of icons that allow you to customize and adjust settings
on NEO.
App Launch Keys
By mapping keys to applications using this program, you can then launch those applications
from a single key-press.
Bluetooth Devices
Provides the tools to manage device pairing and configuration.
Certificates
A public key is transmitted as part of a certificate. The certificate assigned through this icon
is used to ensure that the submitted public key is, in fact, the public key that belongs to the
submitter. The client checks that the certificate has been digitally signed by a certification
authority that the client explicitly trusts. “Certificate Assignment” on page 102 directs you
to the appropriate setup information.
74
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Control Panel Icons
Date/Time
Allows you to set the current Month, Date, Time and Time Zone on your unit.
Dialing
Specifies dialing settings, including area code, country code, dial type and the code to
disable call waiting. You can store multiple patterns – for example, ‘Work’, ‘Home’, and so
on using this dialog box.
Display
Changes the appearance (window colour scheme) on the unit desktop.
Dr. Debug
Provides error diagnostic tools.
Error Reporting
Enables or disables Microsoft error reporting prompts.
Input Panel
Provides the framework for a Soft Input Panel (SIP) should you need to design your own
SIP, or change some soft keyboard options.
Internet Options
Provides options to configure your Internet browser. You can determine items such as the
default and search page that the browser applies when connecting to the Internet, the cache
size, the Internet connection options, and the security level that is applied when browsing.
IPv6 Support
Refers to a new Internet Protocol specification (version 6) that has been published to use
128-bit IP addresses (replacing version 4).
Keyboard
Toggles character repeat on and off and specifies delay and rate for repeated characters. This
applet also allows you to adjust the keyboard backlight threshold and intensity, define OneShot Mode, remap keys using Scancode Remap and program Macro Keys.
Manage Triggers
Allows multiple-scanner trigger management, including the ability to configure each of the
trigger buttons. You can configure the trigger ID for each trigger button for both single- and
double-click, and the double-click time.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
75
Chapter 5: Configuration
Control Panel Icons
Network And Dial-up Connections
Displays a network window from which NEO 802.11g radio can be configured and an existing configuration can be executed. Refer to “Configuring The 802.11b/g Radio” on page 12
for details.
Owner
Provides fields in which you can specify owner information. A Notes tab allows additional
information to be entered and displayed when the unit is powered up. Network ID tab information is used to access network resources. (This information should be provided by your
System Administrator.)
Password
Allows you to assign a password to restrict access to elements of the unit. Once assigned,
password access cannot be circumvented so it is important that you write down your password and keep it in a safe place. Refer to “Security Settings” on page 59 for details.
PC Connection
Enables direct connections to a desktop computer. Selecting the Change Connection button
allows you to change the type of direct connect to your PC.
Power
Displays battery pack power status. (Alternately, battery status can be accessed through the
taskbar.) Additional tabs allow you to determine suspend states, specify a suspend threshold
and, when seated in either the Combo Dock or Quad Dock, determine whether or not a
battery that requires it can be recalibrated. This dialog box also allows you to activate card
slots and built-in devices. (Refer to “Devices” on page 96 for details.)
RDC Licenses
The Terminal Services license server stores all license tokens that have been installed for a
group of terminal servers and tracks licenses issued. The Remote Desktop Licenses (RDC)
application displays license ‘tokens’ for devices that connect to a Terminal Server. Note that
this option is not available for units equipped with Windows CE 5.0 Core.
Region & Language
Allows you to specify the local language that is to be displayed on the hand-held screen
along with the format of numbers, currency, time and date for your region.
76
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Control Panel Icons
Remove Programs
Lists the programs that can be removed from your unit. To remove a program, select it and
then click on the Remove button.
Storage Manager
Allows the user to view information about the storage devices that are present, such as SDMMC flash cards. For details, see page 121.
Stylus
Adjusts how Windows CE 5.0 recognizes your double-tap (as slow or rapid successive taps).
In the Calibration tab, you can recalibrate your touchscreen by tapping on the Recalibrate
button and following the directions on the screen.
System
Displays system and memory properties. In the Memory tab, you can allocate memory
between storage memory and program memory.
Teklogix Imagers
Used to create, modify, delete and activate imager settings. The principal uses of the applet
are to decode bar codes and to capture images.
Teklogix Scanners
Provides scanner parameters and the bar code symbologies that NEO scanner will successfully read.
Total Recall
Provides access to a backup and restore utility to maintain applications and settings over
cold reboots.
TweakIT Settings
Allows you to change Advanced System Settings (interface, network, and servers), User
System Settings (display font size), and provides the Registry Editor.
Volume & Sounds
Allows you to adjust the volume of the sound emitted to indicate events like warnings, key
clicks and screen taps.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
77
Chapter 5: Configuration
Basic Setup
5.5
Basic Setup
5.5.1
Display Properties
•
In the Control Panel, choose the Display icon.
5.5.1.1 Display Backlight
The backlight is activated for a configurable amount of time when NEO is in use (key press,
scanner trigger, or data received from the host). The Display Properties dialog box in the
Control Panel allows you to specify the intensity of the backlight along with how long the
display will maintain the specified intensity.
Note: Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only.
•
In the Display Properties dialog box, open the Backlight tab.
Note: Backlight changes take effect immediately. You do not need to reset the unit.
To maximize battery run time, keep the display backlight brightness and active
durations as low as possible.
78
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Display Properties
Intensity
This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the backlight. Sliding the bar to the left
lowers the light intensity, and sliding it to the right raises the intensity.You can also adjust
the backlight directly from the keyboard by pressing [FN/BLUE] followed by the [LEFT] or
[RIGHT] arrow keys to increase or decrease the backlight intensity.
Bright For
The value chosen from this drop-down menu determines the duration of time that the backlight stays on at the configured intensity after the last user action (keypress, scan trigger).
Dim For
The value chosen from this drop-down menu determines the duration of time that the backlight stays on at half the configured intensity (dimmed backlight) after expiration of the
Bright For delay and as long as no user action takes place (such as a keypress or scan trigger). At the expiration of the Dim For duration, the display backlight shuts off.
External Power Checkbox
When you select the checkbox next to When using external power keep the backlight always
ON, the backlight remains on at the configured intensity when NEO is operating with external power (not battery power). If NEO is drawing power from its battery, this option is
ignored and the other parameters defined in Display Properties dialog box are used.
5.5.1.2 Display Appearance
•
In the Display Properties dialog box, open the Appearance tab.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
79
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Properties
This dialog box allows you to customize the display colour scheme.
5.5.2
Keyboard Properties
This icon displays the Keyboard Properties dialog box in which you can adjust the repeat
rate of the keys, the intensity of the keyboard backlight and the behaviour of the [FN/BLUE]
and [FN/ORANGE] modifier keys. This dialog box also allows you to define macro keys
and Unicode characters.
•
In the Start Menu, choose Settings>Control Panel>Keyboard icon.
5.5.2.1 Key Repeat
Note: These settings apply when a key is held down continuously.
•
In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the Repeattab.
Repeat Delay
The value assigned for this parameter determines the delay between repeat characters.
Sliding the Repeat Delay bar to the left increases the delay between key repeats, and sliding
the bar to the right shortens the repeat delay time.
80
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Properties
Repeat Rate
The value assigned for the Repeat Rate parameter determines how quickly the key you press
repeats. Sliding the bar to the left slows the repeat rate, and sliding the bar to the right increases the repeat rate.
Note: Use the field at the bottom of this dialog box to test the repeat delay and rate settings you’ve chosen.
5.5.2.2 Sequence
This tab determines the allowable pause between alpha key presses on a numeric keyboard.
For example, suppose you want to type the letter ‘c’ – you would need to press the [2] key
three times. With the [ORANGE] key locked ‘on’, if you press [2] twice and then pause
between key presses for 1 second, the letter ‘b’ will be selected automatically. Moving the
Sequence slider to the right increases the pause time between alpha key presses.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
81
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Properties
5.5.2.3 Keyboard Backlight
•
In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the Backlight tab.
Intensity
This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the keyboard backlight. Sliding the bar
to the left darkens the keyboard backlight intensity, and sliding it to the right lightens the
intensity.
ON For
The value chosen from this drop-down menu determines the duration of time that the keyboard backlight stays on when a unit is not in use.
Note: Tapping in the checkbox next to ‘When using external power, keep the backlight
always ON’ forces the keyboard backlight to remain on when the unit is operating
with external power.
Note: To maximize battery run time, keep the backlight intensity at the lowest possible
setting.
82
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Properties
5.5.2.4 Keyboard One Shot Modes
•
In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the One Shots tab.
The options in this tab allow you to determine how modifier keys will behave on NEO. For
each modifier key – [ALT], [SHIFT], [CTRL], [FN/ORANGE] and [FN/BLUE] – you have
the following options in the drop-down menu: Lock, OneShot, and OneShot/Lock.
Note: Keep in mind that checking the taskbar lets you know whether or not these keys are
locked on. For example, if the [FN/ORANGE] key is locked ‘on’, the taskbar at the
bottom of the screen displays it in uppercase characters, ORANGE KEY. If this key
is displayed in lowercase characters in the taskbar, you’ll know that the orange key
is not locked. It will become inactive following a key press.
Important: Once you’ve assigned a One Shot mode to a modifier key, you need to tap
on the OK button at the top of the tab to activate your selection.
Lock
If you choose Lock from the drop-down menu, pressing a modifier key once locks it ‘on’
until you press the modifier key a second time to unlock or turn it off.
OneShot
If you choose OneShot, the modifier key remains active only until the next key is pressed.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
83
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Properties
OneShot/Lock
OneShot/Lock allows you to combine these functions. When you choose this option and you
press the modifier key once, it remains active only until the next key is pressed.
If you press the modifier key twice, it is locked ‘on’, remaining active until the modifier key
is pressed a third time to turn it ‘off’.
5.5.2.5 Keyboard Macro Keys
The Macro tab is used to define up to 15 macros. Macros can be created to replace frequently used keystrokes, along with the function of executable keys including [ENTER],
[BKSP] and [DEL] ([FN/BLUE]-[BKSP]), function keys and arrow keys. Each macro can
have up to 200 programmable characters (or “positions”).
Important: Macro keys are not physically stamped on this hand-held; ‘Scancode Remapping’ must be used to remap keyboard keys into macro keys so that you
can execute the macros created here. Refer to “Scancode Remapping” on
page 87 for details about mapping keys.
To create a macro:
•
In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the Macros tab.
Recording And Saving A Macro
•
84
In the Macro: menu highlight a macro key number, for example macro 1. Tap on the
Record button.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Properties
A message screen is displayed instructing you to Enter Key Strokes to Record.
•
Type the macro sequence you want to create. You can type text and numbers, and you
can program the function of special keys into a macro.
• When you’ve finished recording your macro sequence, tap on the Stop Recording
button, or press the key sequence: [CTRL] [ALT] [ENTER].
A new screen called Verify Macro displays the macro sequence you created.
•
•
Tap on the Save button to save your macro, or Cancel to discard it.
Tap on OK to save your macro key assignment.
Executing A Macro
To execute a macro:
•
Remember that you need to remap a keyboard key to act as a macro key using
Scancode Mapping. Press the mapped macro key(s) to execute the macro.
Deleting A Macro
To delete a macro:
•
•
In the Macros tab, highlight the macro number you want to delete.
Tap on the Delete button.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
85
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Properties
5.5.2.6 Unicode Mapping
•
In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the Unicode Mapping tab.
The Unicode Mapping tab is used to map combinations of virtual key values and [CTRL]
and [SHIFT] states to Unicode™ values. This tab shows the configured Unicode character
along with the Unicode value. For example, the sample screen above shows “a (U+0061)”
indicating that the character “a” is represented by the Unicode value “0061”, and so on.
Keep in mind that Unicode configurations are represented as hexadecimal rather than
decimal values.
All user-defined Unicode mappings are listed in the Unicode Mapping tab in order of virtual
key value, and then by order of the shift state. If a Unicode mapping is not listed, the
Unicode mapping is mapped to the default Unicode value.
Adding and Changing Unicode Values
Important: Changes to Unicode mappings are not saved until you exit the Keyboard
Properties dialog box.
•
86
Choose the Add/Change button
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Properties
Figure 5.2 Adding And Changing Unicode Values
•
•
Highlight a value in the Unicode mapping list. In the sample screen above, a value will
be assigned to virtual key 0 (VK 0).
Position the cursor in the Unicode Mapping field, and type a Unicode value for the
highlighted key.
Note: To add a shifted state, [SHIFT] and/or [CTRL], press [TAB] to position the cursor
in the checkbox next to ‘SHIFT Pressed’ and/or ‘CTRL Pressed’. Press [SPACE] to
select the shift state you want to assign.
Removing Unicode Values
•
In the Unicode Mapping tab, highlight the item you want to delete, and choose the
Remove button.
5.5.2.7 Scancode Remapping
A scancode is a number that is associated with a physical key on a keyboard. Every key has
a unique scancode that is mapped to a virtual key, a function or a macro. Scancode Remapping allows you to change the functionality of any key on the keyboard. A key can be
remapped to send a virtual key (e.g. VK_F represents the ‘F’ key; VK_RETURN represents
the [ENTER] key, etc.), perform a function (e.g. turn the scanner on, change volume/contrast, etc.) or run a macro.
There are three different tables of scancode mappings: the Normal table, the Blue table and
the Orange table. The Normal table defines unmodified key presses; the Blue table defines
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
87
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Properties
key presses that occur when the [FN/BLUE] modifier is on; the Orange table defines key
presses that occur when the [FN/ORANGE] modifier is on. The default mappings of these
scancodes can be overwritten for each of these three tables using the Scancode Remapping
tab accessed from the Keyboard Properties dialog box.
The first column in the Scancode Remapping tab displays the scancodes in hexadecimal. If
the scancode is remapped to a virtual key, that virtual key is displayed in the next column labelled ‘V-Key’. A virtual key that is ‘Shifted’ or ‘Unshifted’ is displayed in the third column
labelled ‘Function’.
If the scancode is remapped to a function or a macro, the first and second columns remain
blank while the third column contains the function name or macro key number
(e.g., Macro 2).
Adding a Remap
To add a new remapping:
•
88
Choose the Add button at the bottom of the dialog box.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Properties
The Remap Scancode dialog box is displayed.
•
Type the scan code in hexadecimal in the field labelled Scancode
Note: The Label field displays the default function of the scancode you are remapping.
Virtual Key, Function and Macro
The radio buttons at the bottom of the dialog box allow you to define to what the scan code
will be remapped: Virtual Key, Function or Macro.
When Virtual Key is selected, you can choose to force [SHIFT] to be on or off when the
virtual key is sent. If No Force is selected, the shift state is dependent on whether the shift
state is on or off at the time the virtual key is sent.
When Function is selected, a list of valid functions appears in the dialog box.
When Macro is selected, the macro keys available on your unit are listed in the dialog box.
•
•
Choose Virtual Key, Function or Macro.
Choose a function from the Function list in the dialog box, and tap on OK.
Editing a Scancode Remap
To edit a scancode:
•
•
•
In the Scancode Remapping tab, tap the stylus on the remap you want to edit.
Tap on the Edit button, and make the appropriate changes.
Tap on OK to save your changes.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
89
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Properties
Removing a Remap
To delete a remap:
•
•
In the Scancode Remapping tab, highlight the scancode you want to delete, and tap on
the Remove button.
Tap on OK.
5.5.2.8 Lock Sequence
The Lock Sequence tab allows you to lock the keyboard to prevent keys from being pressed
accidentally when, for example, the unit is inserted in a holster.
•
•
•
To lock the keyboard, tap in the checkbox next to Enable key lock sequence.
Tap in the checkbox next to Keyboard locked at startup.
In the Key sequence dropdown menu, choose the key sequence you will need to type to
unlock the keyboard.
Note: It is useful to leave the ‘Show popup message’ enabled (default) so that anyone
attempting to use the hand-held keyboard will see the key sequence they will need to
enter to unlock the keyboard displayed on the screen.
90
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Volume and Sound Properties
A locked keyboard icon is displayed in the softkey bar when the keyboard is locked.
Locked Keyboard
Icon
•
5.5.3
Type the key sequence to unlock the keyboard.
Volume and Sound Properties
•
In the Control Panel, choose the Volume & Sounds icon.
5.5.3.1 Volume Adjustments
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
91
Chapter 5: Configuration
Power Properties
•
Slide the volume button to the left to lower the receiver and beeper volume or to the
right to increase the receiver and beeper volume.
• Under the heading Enable sounds for, enable the conditions under which you want NEO
to play a sound.
Keep in mind that adjusting this slider modifies the beeper and the receiver volume.
Note: You can also adjust volume directly from the keyboard. Refer to “Audio Indicators”
on page 38 for details.
5.5.3.2 Sound Adjustments
This dialogue box allows you to assign sounds to identify a particular actions. For example,
you can choose the sound your hand-held will emit when you close a program.
5.5.4
Power Properties
This icon displays a Power Properties dialog box that indicates the battery capacity and
allows you to manage battery use.
•
92
In the Control Panel, choose the Power icon.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Power Properties
5.5.4.1 Battery Capacity
•
In the Power Properties dialog box, open the Battery tab to view battery details.
5.5.4.2 Power Saving Suspend
•
In the Power Properties dialog box, open the Suspend tab.
Power Source
This dialog box allows you to specify the suspend time for either AC Power or
Battery Power.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
93
Chapter 5: Configuration
Power Properties
Suspend Timeout
Important: Psion Teklogix recommends setting the Suspend value to 10 minutes. To
further reduce power consumption, carefully consider the duration of time
that the display and the keyboard backlight are ‘on’ (see “Display Backlight” on page 78 and “Keyboard Backlight” on page 82).
When NEO is idle – not receiving any user input (a key touch, a scan and so on) or system
activity (serial data, an activity initiated by an application and so on) – the hand-held uses
the value assigned in the Suspend Timeout field to determine when the unit will go to sleep
(appear to be off).
When the time in the Suspend Timeout field elapses without any activity, the unit enters
suspend state. In suspend state, the hand-held CPU enters a sleep state, and the radio is shut
off. The state of the device (RAM contents) is preserved. Pressing [ENTER] wakes the
system from suspend state. When NEO is in suspend state, the network connection will not
be broken immediately. If the connection is dropped, you must re-establish the network
connection.
5.5.4.3 Suspend Threshold
The Suspend Threshold lets you determine when NEO will shut down. If the slider is left at
the default value, Maximum Operating Time, the hand-held will run until the battery is completely empty; the RAM is only backed up for a short period of time. If you choose
Maximum Backup Time, the hand-held will shut off with more energy left in the battery so
RAM can be backed up for a longer period of time.
94
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Power Properties
Important: Selecting ‘Maximum backup time’ reserves approximately 20% of the
battery capacity for memory backup. Once the battery is drained, the system
RAM memory is lost and the unit must reboot.
In most real-time transaction environments, this is not a problem (it only
takes a few seconds to boot). However, batch transaction environments,
where data is not saved to non-volatile memory (a microSD FLASH card),
may need to pay particular attention to this parameter. Psion Teklogix does
not recommend the storage of any valuable data in system RAM.
NEO’s Windows CE 5.0 environment does not store any critical data in
RAM (such as the registry or file system).
If the user's application does not save data to RAM, Psion Teklogix recommends keeping the Suspend Threshold setting as low as possible to
maximize battery run time.
5.5.4.4 Advanced
Allow Suspend With:
This tab allows you to specify whether or not your unit will enter Suspend state while it is
operating with an active PPP connection, network interface or active TCP/IP connection.
Low Power Warnings
The sliding scale at the bottom of this tab allows you to specify the remaining battery capacity at which a warning message is displayed on the screen, from 0% to 20%.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
95
Chapter 5: Configuration
Stylus Properties
5.5.4.5 Devices
This tab controls power to the SDIO slot. A checkmark in the checkbox next to SDIO indicates this option is enabled. If you make a change, tap on Apply to save your change.
5.5.4.6 Built-in Devices
The Built-In Devices tab allows you to enable (provide power) or disable (terminate power)
to the device(s) installed in your unit. Keep in mind that the content of this screen varies depending on the devices installed. Tapping on OK activates your selections.
5.5.5
Stylus Properties
•
96
In the Control Panel, choose the Stylus icon.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Stylus Properties
5.5.5.1 Double-Tap
•
In the Double-Tap tab, follow the directions to tailor the sensitivity of the stylus when
you tap on the touchscreen.
5.5.5.2 Calibration
Touchscreens rarely require recalibration. However, if your touchscreen has never been calibrated or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item, follow
the directions below.
•
Choose the Calibration tab, and then tap on the Recalibrate button.
•
Follow the directions in the Calibration tab to recalibrate the screen.
5.5.5.3 Touch
This tab allows you to disable the touchscreen.
• Choose the Touch tab. Tap the checkbox next to Disable the touch panel.
To enable a disabled touchscreen:
•
Press the following keys – [TAB] [SPACE] [ENTER].
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
97
Chapter 5: Configuration
Manage Triggers
•
The Touch tab is displayed. Press the [SPACE] key to uncheck the box and enable
touchscreen operations.
Note: Refer to “Navigating Using the Keyboard” on page 51 for details about navigating
without a touchscreen.
5.5.6
Manage Triggers
This option allows you to configure how bar code scanners and other devices are triggered.
You can configure the trigger ID for each trigger button for both single- and double-click,
and the double-click time.
•
In the Control Panel, choose the Manage Triggers icon.
•
In the Manage Triggers screen you’ll see a list of trigger mappings.
5.5.6.1 Trigger Mappings
A ‘trigger mapping’ is an association between a particular key on the keyboard and a driver
or application (the module). Along with keyboard keys, trigger sources can also be grip triggers, external hardware triggers or software-based. When the specified key is pressed, the
trigger consumer (for example, a decoded scanner) is sent a message.
98
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Manage Triggers
Important: It is not possible to have two or more identical mappings – for example [F1]
cannot be mapped to the Non-Decoded Scanner twice – even if the trigger
type is different.
A keyboard key that is used as a trigger source will no longer generate key
data or perform its normal function. For example, if the space button is
used as a trigger source, it will not be able to send space characters to
applications.
Double-Click
When a key is pressed and released, then pressed again within the configured time (between
0 to 1000 milliseconds), a double-click occurs. See also “Trigger-Press Type” on page 101.
Show All Modules
By default, the trigger mapping list only shows active mappings. Mappings for drivers or
applications that are not currently active are not normally displayed. By checking this
checkbox, all mappings, both active and inactive, are displayed.
Add
Tapping this button brings up the Add Mapping dialog (see “Add and Edit Trigger Mapping”
on page 100), so that you can add new trigger mappings.
Edit
Tapping this button brings up the Edit Mapping dialog (see “Add and Edit Trigger Mapping” on page 100), so that you can edit existing trigger mappings.
Remove
Tapping this button removes an existing mapping.
OK
The OK button in the top right of the Manage Triggers screen saves all changes made. If the
cancel button X is tapped instead, or the [ESC] key is pressed, all changes will be discarded.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
99
Chapter 5: Configuration
Manage Triggers
5.5.6.2 Add and Edit Trigger Mapping
These dialogs allow the user to add and edit trigger mappings.
Trigger Key
This drop-down list allows you to specify the source of the trigger events, such as the Expansion port trigger, Soft Scan and Scan for the trigger module selected.
Note: It is possible to map the same source to different modules (trigger consumers) – for
example, to both the Imager and Non-Decoded Scanner. If so, both devices/operations will occur simultaneously. This is not recommended in most cases, especially
with devices such as Imagers.
It is also possible to map different sources to the same module (trigger consumer).
100
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Manage Triggers
Add Key
Only existing trigger sources are shown in the Source combo-box. To add a new source to
this list, tap on the Add Key button. A dialog will pop up and allow you to select the keyboard key to use as a trigger source.
Trigger-Press Type
You can enable either an Up/Down or Double Click response to a trigger press. Normally,
when a trigger (keyboard key, etc.) is pressed and released, a “trigger down” event is sent to
the “owner”– that is, the application receiving the trigger press information – followed by a
“trigger up”. If Double Click is chosen in this menu, when the trigger is pressed, released,
and then pressed again, a “double-click” event will have occurred. If a mapping with the
type Up/Down has also been configured for the same source, it will only receive the first set
of trigger events.
Module Trigger
This identifies the driver or application receiving the trigger presses.
Show All Modules
By default, inactive owners are not shown. By checking this checkbox, all owners, both
active and inactive, are displayed.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
101
Chapter 5: Configuration
Certificate Assignment
5.5.7
Certificate Assignment
•
In the Control Panel, choose the Certificate icon.
This option is used in conjunction with 802.1x authentication to enhance NEO security.
For a detailed description about Certificate setup for both the server and client-side devices
(NEO hand-helds), refer to the following website:
http://www.microsoft.com/windowsserver2003/techinfo/overview/security.mspx
Note: When importing certificates, NEO only recognizes .cer files.
5.6
Bluetooth Setup
Bluetooth is a global standard for wireless connectivity for digital devices and is intended
for Personal Area Networks (PAN). The technology is based on a short-range radio link that
operates in the ISM band at 2.4 GHz. When two Bluetooth-equipped devices come within a
10 meter range of each other, they can establish a connection. Because Bluetooth utilizes a
radio-based link, it does not require a line-of-sight connection in order to communicate.
Note: The Bluetooth radio uses an internal antenna.
The Bluetooth radio is disabled by default. Before you begin the setup process:
•
102
Under Settings>Control Panel, tap on the Power icon.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Paired Tab
•
Tap on the Built-in Devices tab, and tap in the checkbox next to Enable Bluetooth. Tap
on OK.
When the radio is enabled, a Bluetooth icon appears the taskbar at the bottom of the screen.
It is ready for setup.
•
Tap on Settings>Control Panel>Bluetooth icon.
The Bluetooth Manager allows users to search, pair and connect to other Bluetooth devices
within their personal area network.
5.6.1
Paired Tab
This tab lists all paired devices and their corresponding services. The format of the name is
<Device Name>:<Service Name>. Additional information may appear in this screen such as
the Port Numbers for Serial Profiles service.
To learn how to scan for devices that will appear in this tab, review “Device Tab” on
page 105.
Note: If a service is actively paired and connected, the device and its services are displayed
in bold typeface in this list.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
103
Chapter 5: Configuration
Paired Tab
•
Tap and hold down the stylus on an item in the Paired tab to display an associated popup menu.
This is a service-dependent menu – that is, it varies slightly depending on the service chosen
in the Servers tab. Refer to “Servers Tab” on page 109 for more details.
Query Services and Remove Commands
Note: The Query Services and Remove commands are available in all service-dependent
menus, regardless of the type of service chosen.
•
•
Query Services displays a Services dialog box where a pairing service is chosen.
Remove unpairs the highlighted service and deletes the entry from the tab.
OBEX OPP (Object Exchange-Object Push Profile) Commands
The OPP defines two roles – a Push Server and a Push Client. Push Server is the device that
provides an object exchange server. Push Client is the device that pushes and pulls objects to
and from the Push Server.
OBEX OPP contains the following unique menu option:
•
Send File displays an Open File dialog box where the file to be sent can be selected.
When the transmission begins, another dialog box tracks the progress of the file
transmission.
HSP/HFP (Headset Profile/Hands-Free Profile) Service Commands
The HSP (Headset Profile) allows users to connect their device to Bluetooth enabled headsets and other audio devices.
HSP/HFP services provide the following unique menu options:
104
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Device Tab
•
•
•
5.6.2
Connect Audio establishes an audio connection to the Bluetooth headset.
Disconnect Audio disconnects the audio connection from the Bluetooth headset.
Volume Control displays a dialog box where the headset and microphone volume can be
adjusted.
Device Tab
This tab discovers and displays Bluetooth devices.
5.6.2.1 Discovering and Removing Devices
Scan discovers Bluetooth devices in range of NEO and lists them in this tab. Any existing
devices previously discovered and listed will also be displayed.
Clear removes all Bluetooth devices listed except those with currently paired and connected
services.
Note: To limit the scope of the scan to a particular type of device, refer to “Filtering By
Class of Device (COD)” on page 106.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
105
Chapter 5: Configuration
Device Tab
5.6.2.2 Filtering By Class of Device (COD)
This menu allows you to limit the scope of the scan to a particular type of device. If, for example, you choose Computer from this menu, only computers within range of NEO are
listed in the Device tab. Choosing All lists all detected devices.
5.6.2.3 Device Pop-up Menu
The Device pop-up menu allows you to pair a device, update a device name or delete a
device from the list.
Pair begins the pairing process by inquiring the services and profiles of the discovered
device. An authentication dialog box is displayed the first time a Bluetooth device is paired.
106
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Device Tab
Refresh Name repeats the device name inquiry, updating the name. This command is useful
if a device is listed without a name (unknown), or if a device name has been changed
remotely.
Delete removes this device from the list.
5.6.2.4 Pairing a Device
To pair devices:
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to place the remote device in pairing mode.
• Choose the Devices tab and Scan for devices in your area.
• When the scan is complete, tap on the device to which you want to pair.
• In the pop-up Device menu, tap on Pair.
An Authentication dialog box is displayed.
•
•
If the remote device has authentication enabled, type the PIN in this dialog box.
To proceed without authentication, tap on Next.
Note: If a remote device has authentication enabled and you’ve skipped the authentication
process, a pop-up screen will ask if you want to allow the remote device to connect to
NEO. Tap on Yes and type the PIN. When authentication is complete, tap on Done.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
107
Chapter 5: Configuration
Device Tab
After entering the device PIN, the Services dialog appears with a list of services available for
that device.
• Tap in the checkbox to the left of the service to activate it.
• Tap on Done.
Services that require more information present a configuration dialog box. Serial Profile is
an example.
This dialog box offers a number of additional options such as enabling Encryption and selecting three different modes: Serial, ActiveSync and Scanner.
•
•
108
Serial is used for simple serial port communication.
ActiveSync is for ActiveSync-over-Bluetooth.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Servers Tab
•
Scanner is used to create a seamless connection between the incoming Bluetooth bar
code and NEO.
Once you’ve completed the information:
•
5.6.3
Tap on Next and then in the Services screen, click on Done.
Servers Tab
When a remote Bluetooth device initiates a Bluetooth connection to NEO, the remote device
is considered the ‘Bluetooth master’ and the hand-held, the ‘Bluetooth slave’. In order for
the remote device to connect to NEO, it must offer a service in the form of a server. The
Servers tab allows these services to be enabled and configured. There are three server services available: Serial, Scanner and OBEX OPP.
Serial server enables the Serial Port Profile server; a Serial Port can be selected from the
drop-down menu. Keep in mind that when a port is chosen, an application must be open
(connected) to the chosen port for a remote device to be able to connect.
Scanner server enables a Serial Port Profile server and then relays it to the Scanner Service
(SCS). This is used for Bluetooth bar code scanners that operate in client mode. SCS opens
the server port and handles the scanner input.
OBEX OPP server enables the Object Push Profile server. A warm reset must be performed
on NEO after a change is made to this option. The OPP Server allows other Bluetooth
devices to send files to this device.
•
Tap on the checkbox to activate the server – the associated port name is displayed beside
the server name.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
109
Chapter 5: Configuration
Mode Tab
5.6.4
Mode Tab
The Discoverable option determines whether NEO is visible to other devices.
Device Scan Duration can controls the duration in which NEO scans for other devices. The
higher the value assigned, the greater the scan duration.
5.6.5
About Tab
Device Name displays the NEO name that is broadcast. The name can be changed in the
System Properties applet – Start>Settings>Control Panel>System icon>Device Name tab.
Local Address displays the MAC address (BD_Addr) of the Bluetooth chip.
HCI Version & LMP Version display the version of the chip firmware.
Component indicates the version of the Psion Teklogix Bluetooth Subsystem (the manager,
drivers, etc).
110
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection
Profiles lists the supported profiles on this specific NEO.
5.6.6
Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection
The following steps describe how to set up an internet data connection using a GSM cellular
telephone with Bluetooth. NEO communicates via Bluetooth to the cell phone, which then
accesses a WAN (Wide Area Network) and transfers data using GPRS.
1. Enable the Dial-Up Networking service in the cell phone.
2. Make the phone discoverable.
3. Pair the phone service with the NEO Dial-Up Networking service using the Bluetooth Manager (for instructions on pairing devices, see “Pairing a Device” on
page 107).
4. To set up the internet parameters on the NEO, choose the Network And Dial-up
Connections icon from the Control Panel.
5. Choose the Make New Connection icon.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
111
Chapter 5: Configuration
Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection
6. In the Make New Connection dialog box, choose Dial-Up Connection. Enter a
name for your GPRS network connection.
7. Choose the Next button to display the Modem dialog box.
8. In the drop-down menu labelled Select a modem, choose the name of the modem
with which you want to connect, and then choose the Configure button to display
the Device Properties dialog box.
NEO communicates via Bluetooth to your Bluetooth-equipped cellular telephone and retrieves the parameters for the Device Properties dialog box. NEO then disconnects.
112
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection
9. Under the Call Options tab, turn off Cancel the call if not connected within, and
press [ENTER] to save your changes.
10. In the Modem dialog box, choose the Next button to display the Phone Number
dialog box.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
113
Chapter 5: Configuration
Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection
The phone number you enter is network carrier dependent. Once you’ve specified all the
necessary information, choose the Finish button.
11. In the Control Panel, choose the Dialing icon.
12. The values in the Dialing Properties dialog box need to be edited according to your
network carrier specifications.
Once you’ve edited this dialog box to reflect your network carrier requirements, press
[ENTER] to save your changes.
13. At this point, you’ll need to return to the Control Panel, and choose the Network
and Dial-up Connections icon.
114
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Total Recall
14. In the network connection window, the new network configuration, in this case
lg cx245is displayed. Tap on the new icon.
When you tap on your new connection, an onscreen message indicates the status of your
connection: connected, disconnected, error messages, and so on.
5.7
Total Recall
Total Recall is a Psion Teklogix utility developed to maintain applications and settings
during a cold boot. This utility is based on a backup and restore concept.
•
In the Control Panel, choose the Total Recall icon.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
115
Chapter 5: Configuration
Creating a Backup Profile
5.7.1
Creating a Backup Profile
In the start up screen, you can choose from four options: Create Profile, Restore Profile,
View Profile and Delete Profile.
•
Tap on the Create Profile button to begin the process.
Profile Information
This dialog box displays the default profile name, the type of restore – AutoRestore or ManualRestore, and the possible storage destination for the profile file.
•
•
116
To change the Profile Name (optional), tap on the [...] button to the right of the Profile
Location field.
In the Name field, type a new name. (You may need to move the onscreen keyboard
down to make the Name field visible.)
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Creating a Backup Profile
•
•
Tap on OK to save the new profile name.
Next, choose the profile Type you want to create:
- ManualRestore – creates a backup that is manually restored by the operator.
- AutoRestore – creates a profile that automatically restores itself following a cold reset
or a clean reset.
•
•
•
Finally, if you want to choose another location for your backup file (optional), tap on the
[...] button to the right of the Profile Location field.
Navigate to the new location, and tap on OK to save it.
Tap on the [-->] (Next) button.
Defining the Type of Backup
Default Backup
Default Backup is selected so that all installed or copied files, database entries, and the Registry are saved. Choose Advanced Backup if you want to tailor your backup.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
117
Chapter 5: Configuration
Creating a Backup Profile
Advanced Backup
Choosing Advanced Backup allows you to define what you would like to include in your
backup profile.
•
Tap in the checkbox next to the option(s) listed here to tailor what you want included in
the backup.
Creating a Profile
Once you’ve defined the type of profile you want to create:
• Tap on the Create Profile button.
The options you chose to back up appear in your window as the backup progresses. When
the backup is complete, the last item in the list indicates the location and name of the backup
profile.
118
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Restoring a Profile
5.7.2
Restoring a Profile
To manually restore a profile:
5.7.3
•
•
In the Total Recall home screen, tap on Restore Profile.
Tap on the [...] button to the right of the Profile field and locate your backup file.
•
•
•
Tap on OK.
In the Profile restore screen, click on the [-->] (Next) button.
Click on Restore Profile to restore the files to your hand-held.
Viewing a Profile
To view a profile:
•
In the Total Recall home screen, tap on View Profile.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
119
Chapter 5: Configuration
Deleting a Profile
5.7.4
•
Tap on the [...] button to the right of the Profile field, and locate your backup file.
•
Tap on OK.
•
Tap on View Details to review your backup files.
Deleting a Profile
• In the Total Recall home screen, tap on Delete Profile.
• In the next screen, locate your backup file, and tap on OK.
A warning pop-up screen appears asking if you’re certain that you want to delete this file.
•
120
Tap on Yes to delete the file.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
The Storage Manager
5.8
The Storage Manager
The Storage Manager allows the user to view information about the microSD card present
in NEO.
5.8.1
Formatting a Memory Card
Formatting a memory card bulk-erases it. Once a card is erased, partitions may be created in
it, much like those on a hard drive. Memory-card devices are normally ‘mounted’ (made
available to the system) automatically when they are inserted. They must be dismounted
before they can be formatted.
To format an entire memory card:
1. Choose Start> Settings>Control Panel.
2. In Control Panel, double-click on the Storage Manager icon. The Storage
Manager menu opens:
3. Choose the memory card from the drop-down list.
4. Press the Dismount button to dismount the memory card. All partitions on the card
will be dismounted.
5. Press the Format button to format the memory card.
All partitions and information on the card will be erased during the formatting process.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
121
Chapter 5: Configuration
Creating Partitions
5.8.2
Creating Partitions
Once the card is formatted, new partitions can be created in it. The default is to create one
partition that occupies the whole card, but a card can be divided into more than one partition
if desired. Each partition appears as a separate folder in Windows Explorer.
To create new partitions:
1. Tap the New button next to the Partitions list box. The Create New Partition dialog
box appears:
2. Type a name for the partition.
3. If more than one partition is desired, uncheck the Use All Available Disk Space
checkbox, then specify the desired number of sectors to be used by the partition:
Note: The sector size of the card is given on the left-hand side of the Storage
Properties dialog.
4. Tap OK. The new partition appears in the Partitions list at the bottom of the
The new partition is automatically mounted. This is indicated by an asterisk (*) next to its
name in the partition list. Any unallocated space on the card is indicated at the left, and additional partitions can be created in it.
122
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Partition Management
5.8.3
Partition Management
Partitions can be individually dismounted, mounted, deleted, or formatted as well. These
and additional tasks are available from the Partition Properties dialog:
To dismount a partition:
•
•
•
Choose the desired partition.
Tap the Properties button. The Partition Properties dialog appears.
Tap the Dismount button. The partition is dismounted. The asterisk disappears next to
its name in the partitions list.
To delete a partition:
• Select the desired partition.
• Tap the Delete button. A warning dialog appears.
• Tap the OK button. The partition is deleted.
To format a partition:
1. Choose the desired partition.
2. Tap the Properties button. The Partition Properties dialog appears.
3. Tap the Dismount button. The partition is dismounted. The asterisk disappears next
to its name in the partitions list.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
123
Chapter 5: Configuration
Partition Management
4. Tap the Format button. The Format dialog appears:
5. Choose your format options. These options include:
• Version of file system (FAT-16, for devices holding up to 4 GB; or FAT-32, for
devices containing up to 32 GB).
• Number of FATs (File-Allocation Tables).
• Number of entries allowed in the root directory.
• Cluster size (.5 KB to 64 KB).
There are also two checkboxes, which govern:
• Whether to use the transaction-safe FAT file system (TFAT). This file system keeps
multiple copies of the file-allocation table, changing one while maintaining another
as a backup.
• Whether to perform a quick format. Quick formatting removes all reference to data in
the partition without erasing the actual partition. The partition will be treated as
empty, and new data will overwrite it.
6. Tap Start. The partition is formatted.
To mount a partition:
•
•
•
124
Choose the desired partition.
Tap the Properties button. The Partition Properties dialog appears.
Tap the Mount button. The partition is mounted. The asterisk appears next to its name
in the partitions list.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
IPv6 Support
The Partition Properties dialog has buttons for additional functions. Partitions can be defragmented, and their file structure can be scanned.
5.9
IPv6 Support
The IPv6 Support icon in the Control Panel allows you to activate IPv6 network support on
your unit if your network setup requires this. This internet protocol specification (version 6)
supports 128-bit IP addresses, replacing version 4.
5.10
•
Choose the IPv6 Support icon to display the associated dialog box.
•
Choose the checkbox next to Enable IPv6 Network Support to enable this
internet protocol.
TweakIT
This utility allows you to ‘tweak’ or adjust Advanced system settings (interface, network
and servers), User settings (font size and docking port message), and provides a
Registry Editor.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
125
Chapter 5: Configuration
Advanced
5.10.1 Advanced
5.10.1.1 CE Services Settings
FTP Server
This option is enabled by default to allow file transfers. Keep in mind that data transfer in
either direction is restricted to the Temp folder – that is, data are always loaded from the
FTP Server to the Temp folder and from the Temp folder to the FTP Server.
If this option is disabled, a warm reset must be performed to accept the change.
126
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Advanced
5.10.1.2 Interface and Network Settings
Enable IPv6
This option allows you to enabled Internet Protocol specification, version 6, that has been
published to use 128-bit IP address (replacing version 4).
Modem Logging
When this option is enabled, NEO logs AT commands (e.g., dial-out information, password
string, etc.) that the administrator can monitor for debugging purposes. Modem commands
are stored in: \MdmLog.txt.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
127
Chapter 5: Configuration
Advanced
5.10.1.3 Services Settings
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) Server
The SNTP Server Name typed in this dialog box is used to synchronize NEO time with
server time. A warm reset must be performed once the server name as been entered.
5.10.1.4 Radio Features
AP Density
This option allows you to determine the signal strength at which the NEO’s radio will begin
searching for a new Access Point (AP): High, Medium or Low. If, for example, this option is
set to High, the radio will begin searching for a new Access Point while still at a fairly strong
128
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
User
signal strength. Setting AP Density to Low will cause the radio to wait until the signal
strength is significantly low before attempting to connect to another Access Point.
Depending on your site configuration – for example, the shelving, the Access Point coverage, etc. – a higher setting may improve through-put, increase and maintain signal strength,
and reduce missed transmissions.
Radio Power Management
When this option is enabled, access points that support it will use Radio Power Management
guidelines to control the client (NEO) radio. Access points determine how often the NEO
radio enters sleep mode when no activity is detected to reduce power consumption on the
client side. Another benefit is that when Radio Power Management is enabled, even when
no activity is detected, the access point does not disassociate the NEO (client).
5.10.2 User
5.10.2.1 Internet Explorer Settings
This option allows you to customize how your Internet Explorer is displayed and how the
tabbing functions.
These Internet Explorer options are designed to make it easier to view and navigate web
pages displayed on NEO.
Directional Tabbing, Fit-to-Screen and Focus Rectangle
When Directional Tabbing is enabled, arrow keys can be used to navigate to various links,
text boxes and so on around the page rather than limiting you to the [TAB] key. Fit-toScreen reformats the web page on the NEO screen into a single column, eliminating the
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
129
Chapter 5: Configuration
User
need for horizontal scrolling. Enabling Focus Rectangle adds a yellow rectangle around the
cursor to make it clearly visible on the screen.
5.10.2.2 User Display Settings
User Font Size
This option allows you to adjust the size of the font used the NEO display: Large, Normal
or Small.
5.10.2.3 User System Settings
Docking Port Message
Checking this box blocks the message that normally pops up on the display when NEO
is docked.
130
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Registry Editor
5.10.3 Registry Editor
This option is reserved for senior administrators who have a strong understanding of
registry keys and values. Careless registry editing can cause irreversible damage to NEO.
5.11
Error Reporting
Error Reporting allows you to enable or disable Microsoft error reporting prompts.
•
5.12
Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel. Tap on the Error Reporting icon.
Dr. Debug
Dr. Debug is an error diagnostic tool.
•
Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on Control Panel followed by the Dr. Debug icon.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
131
Chapter 5: Configuration
Status
5.12.1 Status
This tab indicates the status (on/off) of the tools. Tapping on Browse logs displays error logs
for your review.
5.12.2 Settings
•
•
132
Choose an Error Level from the drop down menu.
To change the location where debug information will be stored, tap on the button to the
right of the Log Folder option.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Utilities
5.12.3 Utilities
The Utilities tab is used to log network traffic. When you tap on the Start button, debug data
is collected so that, if necessary, it can be forwarded to a Psion Teklogix technician for
evaluation.
5.13
Teklogix Imagers Settings
The Teklogix Imagers applet is used to create, modify, delete and activate imager settings.
The principal uses of the applet are to decode bar codes and to capture images.
Note: This icon is only displayed when the appropriate imager is installed in your handheld computer.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
133
Chapter 5: Configuration
Imager Demo Applet
•
To launch this applet, tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel, and then tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon.
Important: Refer to Appendix E: “Teklogix Imagers Applet” for details about this
applet.
5.13.1 Imager Demo Applet
An Imager demo applet is also provided to illustrate how the imager works.
•
134
To launch the demo applet, tap on Start>Programs, and then tap on the Imager icon.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Teklogix Scanner Settings
Scanner Menu
5.14
Teklogix Scanner Settings
The Teklogix Scanners icon in the Control Panel provides dialog boxes in which you can
tailor bar code options and choose the bar codes your scanner will recognize. The parameters are preset with the default settings of the decoded scanner installed in the unit. Not all
options apply to all scanners.
For a listing of available scanners and their specifications, please refer to Chapter 7:
“Specifications”.
5.14.1 Bar Codes Tab
Note: Refer to Appendix C: “Bar Code Settings” for details about the symbols for each
scanner type.
5.14.1.1 Scanner Menu
The drop-down menu to the right of the Scanner: option allows you to choose from one of
the following scanner types used with your hand-held: Decoded (internal) and Decoded
(ISCP). If an HHP 5000 imager is installed in your unit, refer to Appendix D: “Teklogix
Imagers Applet” for details about setting up your imager.
The symbologies listed change to reflect the scanner you choose and the bar codes
it supports.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
135
Chapter 5: Configuration
Bar Codes Tab
Important: To improve the decode speed and performance, enable only those codes that
are required by the application.
Keep in mind that some bar code types are only available when an internal imaging scanner
is installed. All internal scanners can be configured using the Barcode dialog boxes.
5.14.1.2 Restoring Default Settings
Note: The pop-up menu function described in this section is only available on units with
the Windows CE Professional operating system.
If you want to restore the factory defaults after making changes, the defaults can be applied
to a selected parameter, sub-tree of parameters or all scanner parameters. To display a popup menu, you need to press and hold the stylus on a menu item. (This equivalent to a rightclick on a PC.)
•
Press and hold the stylus on a symbology (e.g., Code 128) to display a pop-up a menu.
•
Choose Default subtree to reset only the parameters in the symbology you selected, or
choose Default all settings to reset all scanner parameters to default settings.
To reset a single parameter to its default setting:
136
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Options Tab
•
Press and hold the stylus on the parameter you want to reset.
•
Choose Default parameter to reset the parameter to the default setting.
5.14.2 Options Tab
This tab allows you to tailor the double-click parameters and the display options associated
with your scanner.
5.14.2.1 Double Click Parameters
Click Time (msec)
This parameter controls the maximum gap time (in milliseconds) for a double-click. If the
time between the first and second clicks of the scanner trigger is within this time, it is con-
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
137
Chapter 5: Configuration
Options Tab
sidered a double-click. The allowable range is 0 to 1000. A value of zero disables this
feature.
A double-click produces different results depending on whether or not a value is assigned in
the “Click Data” parameter. When a value is not assigned for the “Click Data”, double-clicking the scanner trigger overrides the target dot delay set in the “Dot Time” parameter and
initiates a normal scan sweep. If a value is assigned for the “Click Data” parameter, doubleclicking the scanner trigger inserts the “Click Data” value rather than initiating a scan.
Click Data
This parameter determines which character is sent to the application installed in NEO following a double-click. A dialog box appears, asking that you press the key you want to
insert. The ASCII/Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed.
5.14.2.2 Display Parameters
Scan Result
When this parameter is enabled, the type of bar code and the result of the scan appear on the
screen. Note that this information is only displayed after a successful decode and is visible
only while the scanner trigger is pressed. When the trigger is released, this information is
cleared from the screen.
Scan Indicator
When this parameter is enabled, the laser warning logo appears on the display whenever the
scanner is activated.
Scan Result Time (sec)
The value assigned to the “Scan Result Time (sec)” parameter determines how long the scan
results of a successful scan are displayed on the screen. Time is measured in seconds, and a
value of “0” (zero) disables the parameter. When you choose this option, a dialog box
appears where you can enter a value.
Note: To remove the scan result from the screen before the “Result Time” has expired,
point the scanner away from the bar code and press the trigger.
Good Scan Beep And Bad Scan Beep
These parameters determine whether or not the NEO emits an audible scanner ‘beep’ when
a good (successful) scan or a bad (unsuccessful) scan is performed. Set these parameters to
either on to enable the beeper or off to disable it.
138
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Options Tab
Soft Scan Timeout
This parameter is used by the SDK “Scan” function (soft-scan: starting a scan session via the
SDK function, instead of a physical user trigger press). The value assigned to this parameter
determines the soft-scan timeout from 1 to 10 sec. (default is 3 sec.).
Scan Log File
If this parameter is enabled, the input bar code and the modified/translated output bar code
are logged in the file \Flash Disk\ScanLog.txt. Keep in mind that if the “Scan Log File” is
enabled, there is a slight performance effect when performing multiple scans since the log
file is written to persistent storage.
5.14.2.3 Data Handling
This option allows you to choose the code page NEO will use to display scanned data –
Default Local ASCII or ISO-8859-1 Latin 1.
Codepage:
Tapping on this option displays a window in which you can define the code page NEO will
use.
If you choose Default Local ASCII, the code page of the local OS is used. For example, if
the local OS uses double-byte Chinese characters, choosing this option will filter data
through the local ASCII of that OS and display it accurately, in this example, using doublebyte characters.
If you choose ISO-8859-1 Latin 1, data will be displayed according to the character mapping
of this Latin 1 code page, ignoring the local OS code page.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
139
Chapter 5: Configuration
Translations Tab
5.14.3 Translations Tab
The Translations tab allows you to define up to 10 cases, each consisting of up to 10 rules in
sequential order. Only one case will be applied to a bar code and a case will only be applied
if all rules specified in the case are successful – if a rule within a case fails, the entire
case fails.
•
140
In the Translation tab, tap on the Case # to create rules.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Translations Tab
•
Tap on the No rule drop-down menu to display the rules.
When you choose a rule, an associated screen is displayed in which you can define the rule.
5.14.3.1 Case Rules
The case rules are defined as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
No rule – ignored.
Match at index – matches the match string at a specified index.
Match and replace at index – matches the match string at a specified index and
replaces/changes it.
Replace at index – replaces/changes unspecified data in a given range.
Add barcode prefix/suffix – adds a global prefix or suffix.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
141
Chapter 5: Configuration
Translations Tab
•
•
Verify barcode size – verifies the bar code size. This rule should generally be assigned
first, before creating subsequent rules.
Search and replace – replaces all instances of the match string. (Note that this rule
cannot fail.)
Note: Keep in mind that the effects of previously applied rules must be taken into account
when creating subsequent rules. For example, if the bar code size is important, it
should be checked before any rules that might change the size are applied.
Translation information about the status of each case/rule is displayed in the scan log file
(see “Scan Log File” on page 139) when enabled. This is useful if a case fails, and you are
trying to determine why a rule is failing.
142
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
6
PERIPHERAL DEVICES & ACCESSORIES
6.1 Carrying Accessories . . . . . . . . .
6.1.1 Attaching The Hand Strap .
6.1.2 Belt Clip Installation . . . .
6.1.3 The Expansion Port. . . . .
6.1.4 The Pistol Grip With Stylus
6.2 The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.145
.146
.148
.150
.150
.151
6.3 Adaptor/Cable Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.1 RS-232 Adaptor – Model No. PX3050 . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.2 Micro-USB Adaptor – Model No. PX3054 . . . . . . . .
6.4 Charging Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.1 Installation – Docking Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.2 Power Consumption Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.3 Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5 Desktop Docking Station – PX3001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.1 Desktop Docking Station Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.2 Charging A Battery Installed In NEO . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.3 Charging a Spare Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.4 Battery Charge Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.5 Docking Station Charger LED Indicators . . . . . . . . .
6.5.6 Troubleshooting the Charging Operation of The Dock . .
6.5.6.1 Indicator Solid Red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.6.2 NEO Power LED Does Not Light Up . . . . . .
6.5.6.3 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed
6.5.7 Linking NEO to a PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.8 Linking NEO to an Ethernet Network . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.8.1 Network Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.9 Troubleshooting USB Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6 AC Wall Adaptor– Model No. PX3012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.152
.152
.154
.155
.156
.156
.156
.156
.157
.157
.158
.158
.159
.159
.159
.159
.160
.160
.160
.160
.161
.161
6.7 Cigarette Lighter Adaptor — Model PX3056 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
6.8 Quad Docking Station – PX3004 PC & PX3004 NPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
143
6.8.1 Quad Docking Station Setup . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.2 Quad Docking Station Indicators . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.3 Inserting NEO in the Quad Docking Station . . . .
6.8.4 Network Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.4.1 Network Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.5 Battery Charging – LED Behaviour. . . . . . . . .
6.8.6 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.6.1 Network Link Unsuccessful . . . . . . . .
6.8.6.2 NEO LED Does Not Light When Docked.
6.9 Scanners and Imagers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.1 Basic Scanner Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.2 Scanning Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.3 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10 Bluetooth Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
144
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
163
163
163
163
163
164
164
164
164
164
165
165
166
166
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Carrying Accessories
6.1
Carrying Accessories
There are a variety of carrying accessories to help the operator work safely and comfortably
with NEO.
Table 6.1 Carrying Accessories
Carrying Accessory
Model Number
Hand Strap
PX3024
Wrist Strap (with stitched stylus holder)
PX3028
Carrying Holster (compatible with pistol grip)
PX3020
Carrying Case (leather with protective key cover and clip)
PX3029
Shoulder Strap
PX3022
Belt Kit including Belt Clip, Adaptor Plate and screws
PX3025
Pistol Grip
PX3030
Important: Carrying accessory screws have adhesive pre-applied to them. Do not add
adhesives to secure screws on carrying accessories; these chemicals may
damage the plastic casing.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
145
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Attaching The Hand Strap
6.1.1
Attaching The Hand Strap
The hand strap provides a secure means for operators to carry NEO.
Figure 6.1 The Hand Strap
Eyelet for Screw
Eyelet for
Attaching Tether
Stylus Holder
Elastic Strap
Quick Release
Buckle
Adjustable Velcro
Clasp
Lanyard
•
Thread the lanyard attached to the quick release buckle through one of the accessory
attachment points – the eyelets on the either side of the base of the unit. You may find
Figure 6.2 useful as a reference.
Figure 6.2 Attaching the Quick Release Buckle
1
•
146
2
3
Guide the quick release buckle through the lanyard loop to secure it to the unit.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Attaching The Hand Strap
•
To attach the hand strap, align the eyelet at the top of the hand strap with the threaded
insert near the corner of the hand-held, and secure it in place using the M2x6 screw
included with the hand strap.
Figure 6.3 Attaching the Hand Strap
4
•
Snap the hand-strap buckle into the lanyard quick release buckle.
5
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
147
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Belt Clip Installation
•
Pull up the velcro clasp to adjust the hand strap to fit your hand as required.
6
Stylus Holder
Note: In addition to the hand strap, the lanyard with quick release buckle is also used to
attach the wrist strap (shipped with the hand-held) and the optional shoulder strap to
NEO.
6.1.2
Belt Clip Installation
Figure 6.4 Belt Clip Installation Kit
Belt Clip
Adaptor Plate
Screw M2 x 6
Belt Clip Attached Here
Foam Pad Under
Folded End
•
148
Metal Eyelet
Metal Insert
on NEO Unit
Position the belt clip adaptor plate so that the thicker, folded end aligns with the
angled scanner section on the back of NEO as illustrated in Figure 6.5.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Belt Clip Installation
Figure 6.5 Aligning the Belt Clip Adaptor Plate for Installation
Folded End
Angled Scanner
Section
•
To attach the belt clip adaptor plate to NEO, thread the screws through the eyelets into
the metal inserts on NEO.
Figure 6.6 Attaching The Adaptor Plate
Attach Belt Clip here
Metal Insert
•
1
2
Metal Insert
With the adaptor plate attached to NEO, join the plastic belt clip (included in your kit) to
the adaptor plate.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
149
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
The Expansion Port
6.1.3
The Expansion Port
NEO is equipped with an expansion port so that customised modules (e.g., RFID) can be
easily added to your hand-held computer as they are required.
Expansion Port
Expansion
Port Covered
Expansion
Port Cover
Important: Do not remove the expansion port cover unless an expansion module is
being installed.
6.1.4
The Pistol Grip With Stylus
The pistol grip has been designed to easily attach to NEO without tools or screws. For added
convenience, the pistol grip is equipped with a stylus inserted in the handle.
•
•
150
Remove the expansion port cover on the back of NEO. Store the cover in the underside
of the pistol grip – you’ll see an indent in the shape of the port cover in the pistol plastic.
Position the pistol grip over the slots moulded into the back of NEO, and snap it into
place – no screws required.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
The Battery
Figure 6.7 Attaching the Pistol Grip
Pistol Grip
Stylus
Thumb Latch
Release
To release the pistol grip:
•
Press the thumb latch release, and lift the pistol grip out.
Note: To maintain proper operation, ensure that the expansion port and the pistol grip contacts are dry and free of debris. If necessary, use a soft cloth moistened with alcohol
to clean the contacts.
6.2
The Battery
Important: Carefully review the “NEO Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty
Guide”, PN 8000175, before handling a battery.
NEO operates on a 3300 mAh lithium-ion battery pack, Model No. WA3006.
Note: Review Chapter 7: “Specifications” for detailed information.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
151
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Adaptor/Cable Options
6.3
Adaptor/Cable Options
The following are adaptors that can be ordered for NEO:
Table 6.2 Adaptor/Cable Model Numbers And Descriptions
Model Number
6.3.1
Adaptor/Cable Description
PX3052
Cable/Dongle – Micro-USB to Ethernet
PX3053
Cable – Micro-USB to USB ‘A’ Receptacle
PX3058
Cable – Micro-USB to USB ‘A’
PX3050
Adaptor – Hand-Held to RS-232 Connector
PX3054
Adaptor – Hand-held to Micro-USB with DC Jack
PX3056
Adaptor – Cigarette Lighter
RS-232 Adaptor – Model No. PX3050
This adaptor is equipped with an RS-232 port via a standard non-powered DB9 connector.
Carrying devices such as the wrist strap can still be used when the adaptor is attached to the
hand-held.
Slot to accommodate
Carrying Strap
RS-232 Port
To attach the adaptor to NEO:
•
•
152
Make certain that the adaptor connector and NEO docking port are free of dust or any
other debris before connecting them.
A slot on the side of the adaptor is provided to accommodate the carrying strap. Thread
the carrying strap through the slot on the adaptor. (Refer to Figure 6.8 on page 153.)
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
RS-232 Adaptor – Model No. PX3050
Figure 6.8 Threading Wrist Strap Through Adaptor
Slot to accommodate
Carrying Strap
Thread Carrying Strap
through slot in Adaptor
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
153
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Micro-USB Adaptor – Model No. PX3054
•
6.3.2
Align the docking port on the base of NEO with the adaptor, and gently snap the adaptor
into place.
Micro-USB Adaptor – Model No. PX3054
This adaptor is equipped with a micro-USB port along with a DC IN socket. When attached
to NEO, the adaptor allows you to connect an AC wall adaptor (Model No. PX3012) or an
automotive power adaptor (Model No. PX3056) to the hand-held. The micro-USB port
allows you to utilize the micro-USB to Ethernet cable (Model No. PX3052) and the micro-
154
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Charging Options
USB to USB ‘A’ (Model No. PX3058 & PX3053). Carrying devices such as the wrist strap
can still be used when the adaptor is attached to the hand-held.
Slot to accommodate
Wrist Strap
Micro-USB Port
DC IN Socket
To attach this adaptor:
•
•
•
6.4
Make certain that the adaptor connector and NEO docking port are free of dust or any
other debris before connecting them.
A slot on the side of the adaptor is provided to accommodate the wrist strap. Thread the
wrist strap through the slot on the adaptor. (See Figure 6.8 on page 153 for details.)
Align the docking port on the base of NEO with the adaptor, and gently snap the adaptor
into place.
Charging Options
Psion Teklogix offers a variety of charging options for NEO. These include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
AC Adaptor – Model No. PX3012 with PX3054
Cigarette Lighter Adaptor – Model No. PX3056 with PX3054
Desktop Docking Station – Model No. PX3001
Desktop Docking Station with Integrated V.92 Analog Modem – Model No. PX3008
Quad Docking Station – Model No. PX3004 PC and PX3004 NPC
Battery Chargers for charging batteries only:
- Quad Battery Charger – Model No. WA3004
- Single Battery Charger – Model No. WA3001
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
155
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Installation – Docking Stations
6.4.1
Installation – Docking Stations
When installing a docking station, consider the following guidelines.
•
•
Keep docking stations away from excessive dirt, dust and contaminants.
Docking stations will not charge batteries outside an ambient temperature range of 0 °C
to 45 °C (32 °F to 113 °F). It is recommended that the docking station be operated at
room temperature – between 18 °C and 25 °C (64 °F to 77 °F) for maximum
performance.
After unpacking your unit:
•
•
6.4.2
Visually inspect the docking station for possible damage.
Install the IEC power cord and apply power.
Power Consumption Considerations
Check to ensure the mains circuit supplying docking stations is adequate for the load, especially if several docking stations are being powered from the same circuit.
•
6.4.3
Quad docking station–can consume up to 3A @ 120VAC or 1.5A @ 240VAC.
Operator Controls
NEO docking stations have no operator controls or power switches.
6.5
Desktop Docking Station – PX3001
Figure 6.9 Desktop Docking Station
Spare Battery
Charge Well
Connector
Pins
Tri-coloured
LED
156
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Desktop Docking Station Setup
Note: The desktop docking station is shipped with its own user manual. It is critical that it
be reviewed for additional information and updates.
The desktop docking station is designed to charge the battery installed in NEO along with a
spare battery pack. It is equipped with a micro-USB port.
Figure 6.10 Back of Desktop Docking Station
Micro-USB Port
DC IN Socket
Important: This docking station can only be used to charge Psion Teklogix approved
lithium-ion batteries.
6.5.1
Desktop Docking Station Setup
Refer to instruction sheet PN 1081333 for a checklist of startup steps. You can find this
instruction sheet on Teknet. Go to www.psionteklogix.com. Tap on Teknet and enter your
user name and password. If you’re not already a member, you will be asked to register free
of charge.
6.5.2
Charging A Battery Installed In NEO
Important: Before charging a battery, it is critical that you review the “NEO Hand-Held
Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide, PN 8000175.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
157
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Charging a Spare Battery
•
Insert the DC power cable to the DC IN port on the desktop docking station. Plug the
pronged end of the cable into an AC outlet.
• Slide NEO into the docking station, making certain that the connector on the base of the
hand-held is securely seated on the docking station connector pins. An icon is displayed
in the task bar at the bottom of the hand-held screen indicating that the unit is properly
installed in the station:
The LED on NEO lights up indicating that the unit has external power and battery charging
will begin. It is safe to leave the unit in the desktop docking station while it is not in use – the
battery will not be overcharged.
Note: To maintain the NEO real time clock for three days, the battery must be charged for
a minimum of two hours (while installed in the hand-held).
6.5.3
Charging a Spare Battery
To charge a spare battery:
•
Insert the battery in the spare battery charge well at the back of the docking station,
aligning the contacts on the battery with the contacts in the spare battery charge well.
Note: To maintain the NEO real time clock for three days, a battery must be charged for at
least two hours while installed in the hand-held; however, if you are charging a
spare battery (not installed in the hand-held), the real time clock three day backup
cannot be maintained until a charged battery is installed in the hand-held computer
for at least two hours.
6.5.4
Battery Charge Duration
When NEO is inserted in the desktop docking station, 3 hours is required to charge the
battery to 75% capacity.
Note: The specified battery charge times are based on NEO default settings – i.e., display
brightness 50%, keyboard backlight off, 802.11b/g radio on and 23° C temperature.
Additional peripherals and other power consumption features will also alter the
specified charge time.
The desktop docking station stops applying power to the battery when it is fully charged–
there is no risk of overcharge if the battery remains in the charge well.
158
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Docking Station Charger LED Indicators
6.5.5
Docking Station Charger LED Indicators
The desktop docking station is equipped with a single tri-coloured LED indicator in the
lower-right corner of the front panel that indicates various charge states of the spare battery
installed in the docking station.
Note: During the first two minutes of a battery charge, the LED remains solid yellow
while the hand-held computer status is assessed and the super capacitor is charged.
Table 6.3 Desktop Docking Station Charger LED Behaviour
LED Behaviour
Charge Status
Off
No battery detected in the slot.
Solid Yellow
Battery charged to less than 75% of capacity.
Flashing Green
Battery charged to between 75% and 95% of capacity.
Solid Green
Charge complete.
Flashing Yellow
Battery is not charging. The battery temperature is outside of the
charge range of 0º C to 45º C.
Solid Red
Battery is not charging. Battery fault.
Note: Battery charging continues whether the hand-held is switched on or off.
6.5.6
Troubleshooting the Charging Operation of The Dock
6.5.6.1 Indicator Solid Red
If the indicator is solid red:
• Remove the battery and disconnect the mains power cable.
• Wait at least 20 seconds, and then plug the cable in again.
If the charge well LED remains solid red, the battery may be defective or there is a power
supply problem.
6.5.6.2 NEO Power LED Does Not Light Up
•
•
•
Ensure NEO is fully seated in the dock.
Verify that there is power from the mains outlet.
Remove the power cable from the docking station, and check it for damage.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
159
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Linking NEO to a PC
•
Reconnect the power cable to the outlet.
6.5.6.3 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed
•
•
•
•
•
6.5.7
Reinstall the battery, and check that it is fully seated in the charge well.
Remove the battery, and clean the contacts on the battery and the charge well.
Inspect the charge well contacts for damage (are they bent, flattened, twisted or broken).
Try inserting a battery that you know to be working in the charge well.
Reconnect the power cable, and check that the charge well indicator flashes at powerup.
Linking NEO to a PC
The desktop docking station can be connected to a PC so that you can exchange files or
install applications. A USB cable is included with your docking station.
Note: For information about data transfer with the Windows XP operating system and
ActiveSync or with the Vista operating system, refer to “Data Transfer Between The
PC And The Hand-Held” on page 19.
To link NEO to a PC:
•
•
6.5.8
Insert the hand-held in the desktop docking station.
Insert the micro-USB connector into the docking station connector. Attach the other end
of the cable into a USB port on the PC.
Linking NEO to an Ethernet Network
A micro-USB Ethernet adaptor cable – model number PX3052 – is used to connect NEO to
an Ethernet network through a desktop docking station.
•
•
Insert the micro-USB connector on the adaptor cable into the micro-USB port on the
back of the desktop docking station.
Connect your network Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on the adaptor cable.
6.5.8.1 Network Access
The hand-held unit automatically detects insertion into the desktop dock and loads the appropriate drivers to communicate with the micro-USB Ethernet converters.
Network Addressing
The host application uses standard TCP/IP protocol to name, locate and communicate with a
specific NEO on the network.
160
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Troubleshooting USB Operations
If a link is established between NEO and a host, the application on the host and on the handheld must have a recovery mechanism in the event that NEO is removed from the dock, interrupting the link.
6.5.9
Troubleshooting USB Operations
•
•
•
6.6
Ensure that the unit is fully seated in the dock. A dock icon should be visible in the
task bar.
Ensure the USB cabling is connected properly.
Ensure NEO and docking station contacts are not contaminated.
AC Wall Adaptor– Model No. PX3012
The AC wall adaptor available for your docking station allows you to operate your handheld using AC power while charging the battery inserted in the unit.
Adaptor plugs suitable for use in various countries are shipped with the AC wall adaptor.
DC Power Plug
Universal AC Power Supply
Adaptor Plugs
•
•
•
6.7
Choose the adaptor plug that is suitable for use in your country. Slide the adaptor plug
into the Universal AC power supply, snapping it into place. These two pieces, coupled
together, are referred to as an AC wall adaptor.
Insert the DC power plug into the DC IN socket at the back of the charger.
Plug the pronged end into an AC outlet.
Cigarette Lighter Adaptor — Model PX3056
The cigarette lighter adaptor allows you to power your hand-held and recharge your battery
using power drawn from your vehicle’s automotive power outlet when used in conjunction
with the DC/USB Adaptor, Model No. PX3054.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
161
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Quad Docking Station – PX3004 PC & PX3004 NPC
Figure 6.11 Automotive Power Adaptor
Automotive Power Adaptor Plug
DC Power Plug
•
•
•
Attach the micro-USB adaptor, model number PX3054, to the base of NEO. Refer to
“Micro-USB Adaptor – Model No. PX3054” on page 154 if you require further details.
The desktop docking station is also equipped with a DC IN socket to which you can
connect the automotive adaptor.
Insert the DC power plug on the automotive adaptor into the DC IN socket on the
Micro-USB adaptor or desktop docking station.
Insert the automotive power adaptor plug into automotive power outlet in your vehicle.
Note: Battery charging continues whether the hand-held is switched on or off.
6.8
Quad Docking Station – PX3004 PC & PX3004 NPC
Note: The quad docking station is shipped with a user manual. It is critical that this manual be reviewed for additional information and updates.
162
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Quad Docking Station Setup
The quad docking station permits each of four docked NEOs to communicate with a 10/100
BaseT Ethernet network. It also provides sufficient power to operate the hand-helds and
charge their batteries.
Important: The Ethernet connection on the quad docking station is designed for indoor
use only!
6.8.1
Quad Docking Station Setup
Refer to instruction sheet PN 1081342 for a checklist of startup steps. You can find this
instruction sheet on Teknet. Go to www.psionteklogix.com. Tap on Teknet and enter you
user name and password. If you’re not already a member, you will be asked to register free
of charge.
6.8.2
Quad Docking Station Indicators
The quad dock is equipped with a power indicator LED and RJ45 link and traffic
indicator LEDs. When a valid link is established, a green LED is illuminated next to
the RJ45 connector.
6.8.3
Inserting NEO in the Quad Docking Station
• Slide NEO into the cradle portion of the quad dock until lightly latched.
The LED on the hand-held unit lights up to show it has external power and may start charging the battery.
Interaction with NEO while in the quad dock is a function of the user application software
used to communicate with the host network.
6.8.4
Network Access
The quad docking station has one 10/100 Ethernet port. You can insert up to four hand-held
units. The hand-helds are connected to an internal USB hub. The hand-held unit automatically detects insertion into a quad docking station and loads the appropriate drivers to
communicate with the USB/Ethernet converters.
6.8.4.1 Network Addressing
Although the USB converters have fixed Ethernet MAC addresses, there is generally no correlation between these addresses and a specific hand-held. The host application uses
standard TCP/IP protocol to name, locate and communicate with a specific NEO on
the network.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
163
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Battery Charging – LED Behaviour
If a link is established between NEO and a host, the application on the host and on the handheld must have a recovery mechanism in the event that NEO is removed from the dock and
the link is interrupted.
6.8.5
Battery Charging – LED Behaviour
Charge status is displayed on the hand-held LED. Refer to Table 6.3 on page 159 for
detailed LED charge behaviour. When inserted in the quad dock, NEO requires 3 hours to
charge to charge the battery to 75% capacity. Charge durations are independent of the
number of NEOs docked.
Note: The specified battery charge times are based on NEO being powered off. Additional
peripherals and other power consumption features will also alter the specified
charge time.
6.8.6
Troubleshooting
The indicators, applications and drivers required to use and monitor the docking station are
installed on NEO – no indicators or applications are present on the docking station itself.
6.8.6.1 Network Link Unsuccessful
If a network link fails, the application must take appropriate action.
6.8.6.2 NEO LED Does Not Light When Docked
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
6.9
Check that the quad docking station has power: Is the Power LED on the docking
station illuminated?
Try inserting NEO in another well in the quad dock.
Check for dirt or contamination on the docking contacts at the bottom of NEO. Wipe the
contacts with a damp cloth if necessary.
Check the connector pins inside the dock cradle for dirt. Gently wipe with a soft cloth if
they appear to be dirty or discoloured.
Check that the contacts are not bent or damaged.
Remove and reinsert NEO in the cradle.
Make certain that the battery installed in NEO is not defective.
Scanners and Imagers
NEO supports 1D laser scanner (SE955), 2D imager (HHP 5000) and 1D imager (EV15)
options to address a variety of user application requirements. The scanner installed in your
164
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Basic Scanner Operations
unit can be configured using the Scanner Settings dialog box in the Control Panel (see “Teklogix Scanner Settings” on page 135 and Appendix C, “Bar Code Settings,”) and the
Manage Triggers application (see page 98).
If a 2D imager is installed in your unit, the imager can be configured using the Teklogix
Imager applet. For details, refer to “Imager Demo Applet” on page 134 and Appendix D:
“Teklogix Imagers Applet”.
Important: It is critical that you review the “NEO Hand-Held Computer Regulatory &
Warranty Guide, PN 8000175, before proceeding.
6.9.1
Basic Scanner Operations
•
•
6.9.2
Turn the hand-held on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely.
Aim at the bar code and press the scan key or the trigger. A scan beam and a warning
indicator appear until a successful decode is achieved or six seconds have elapsed.
Scanning Techniques
•
NEO’s unique ergonomic design allows you to hold the hand-held at a comfortable
angle while scanning.
• Ensure that the scanner beam is not perpendicular to the bar code. Light reflected
directly back into the scanner’s exit window may prevent a successful decode.
• Scan the entire bar code. If you are using a 1D laser scanner, make certain that the scan
beam crosses every bar and space on the bar code, including the margins on either end
of the symbol.
• When using imaging scanners, do not move the scanner while decoding the bar code.
Movement blurs the image.
• Hold the scanner farther away for larger bar codes.
• Hold the scanner closer for bar codes with bars that are close together.
A bar code icon appears on the screen during a scan. While the scanner beam is active, the
onscreen message states: SCANNING. If you want to turn off the onscreen message, disable
Scan Indication in the Options tab of the Scanner Settings menu in the Control Panel.
When the scan is successful, the bar code data is displayed on the screen until the scan
button (or pistol trigger) is released, but only if Scan Result is turned on in the Options tab
of the Scanner Settings menu in the Control Panel.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
165
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Troubleshooting
6.9.3
Troubleshooting
If the scanner is not working, investigate the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
6.10
Check that the bar code symbology being scanned is enabled for the hand-held you are
using. Check any other parameters that affect the scanning procedure or the bar code.
Check the bar code to make sure it is not damaged. Try scanning a different bar code to
verify that the problem is not with the bar code.
Check that the bar code is within the specified decode zone. Refer to “Scanner/Imager
Specifications” on page 173 for details.
Does the hand-held display the warning without scanning? This suggests a hardware
problem in the hand-held.
Is the laser beam scanning across the bar code?
Once the scan beam has stopped, check the scanner window for dirt, fogging or damage.
Bluetooth Peripherals
NEOs equipped with Bluetooth radios make it possible to communicate with a variety of
Bluetooth peripherals, including GSM/GPRS handsets, scanners, printers, and so on.
The range of the Bluetooth radio is limited to approximately 10 meters.
Psion Teklogix provides built-in support for the Bluetooth peripherals listed below.
• GSM/GPRS universal handset.
• Bluetooth printer.
• Bluetooth headset.
Keep in mind that Bluetooth and IEEE 802.11b/g radios both operate in the 2.4GHz band.
Although NEO includes features to minimize interference, performance of the system will
not be optimal if you use both radios simultaneously. Typically, when both radios operate in
the hand-held at the same time, they cannot transmit simultaneously – this has a negative
impact on overall system throughput. To minimize the impact on the backbone 802.11g network, Psion Teklogix recommends using Bluetooth peripherals that have low transaction
rates (such as printers and scanners).
Refer to “Bluetooth Setup” on page 102 for information about setting up your Bluetooth
devices for communication. In addition, review the manual shipped with your Bluetooth
device to determine the method used to pair with the NEO host.
166
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
7
SPECIFICATIONS
7.1 NEO Hand-Held Specifications . . . . . . . .
7.1.1 Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3 Wireless Communication. . . . . . .
7.1.4 Bar Code Applications . . . . . . . .
7.2 NEO Radio Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1 802.11b/g Radio . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2 Bluetooth Radio . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 Scanner/Imager Specifications . . . . . . . . .
7.3.1 SE 955HP Specifications. . . . . . .
7.3.1.1 SE 955HP Decode Zone . .
7.3.2 EV15 Imager Specifications . . . . .
7.3.2.1 EV15 Imager Decode Zone .
7.3.3 HHP 5000 Imager Performance . . .
7.3.3.1 HHP 5000 Decode Zone . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.169
.169
.170
.171
.171
.171
.171
.172
.173
.173
.173
.174
.174
.174
.175
167
Chapter 7: Specifications
NEO Hand-Held Specifications
7.1
NEO Hand-Held Specifications
Note: Performance specifications are nominal & subject to change without notice.
7.1.1
Hardware
Physical Dimensions
•
168 mm x 64 mm x 34 mm (6.6 in. x 2.5 in. x 1.3 in.)
Weight (with battery pack)
•
275 g (0.6 lbs.)
User Interface
Colour Touchscreen Display:
•
•
•
•
•
6.86 cm (2.7 in.) diagonal in QVGA portrait mode
Sunlight readable transmissive with touchscreen
Colour 240 x 320 graphic TFT
Passive stylus or finger operation
LED backlit keyboard
Keyboard:
•
•
•
48-key Alpha Numeric
26-key Numeric
Ergonomically enhanced for ambidextrous, one-hand operation
Indicators & Controls:
•
Tri-coloured LED indicates battery charge and scan status
Audio:
•
•
•
Built-in microphone and receiver on all Connected hand-helds
85db internal beeper
Bluetooth (on equipped models)
Internal Expansion Slot
•
One microSD memory card slot – user accessible.
Expansion Port
•
Battery Power
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
169
Chapter 7: Specifications
Software
•
USB signalling
Docking Port
•
•
•
RS-232
USB
DC Input
Environmental Specifications
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7.1.2
Drop Test: 1.2 m (4 ft.) - 26 drops to polished concrete
Rain/Dust: IP54, IEC 529
Operating Temperature: -10 °C to +50 °C (14 °F to 122 °F)
Storage Temperature: -20 ºC to +60 ºC (-4 ºF to 140 ºF)
Relative Humidity: 5% to 95% RH non-condensing
Storage Temperature: -20 °C to +60 °C (13 °F to 140 °F)
Shock and Vibration: Random vibration 1 m2/s3 @ 5 to 200 Hz, 0.5 m2/s3 @ 200-500
with duration of 100 min/axis, 3 axes and shock of 150 m/s2 @ 11ms and 300 m/s2 @
6ms.
ESD: ± 8kVdc air discharge, ± 4kVdc contacts
Software
Platform
•
•
PXA270 Processor @ 624 or 312 MHz
Memory:
- On-board RAM: 128 MB SDRAM
- On-board ROM: 128 MB Flash
Operating System
•
•
Microsoft® Windows® CE 5.0 Professional (connected variant)
Microsoft® Windows® CE 5.0 Core (batch variant)
Programming Environment
•
•
170
HTML, XML.
Mobile Devices SDK:
- CE .NET SDK
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 7: Specifications
Wireless Communication
- Java Visual C++
- Standard protocols APIs – Windows® sockets (WinCE)
Application Software
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7.1.3
Wireless Communication
•
•
7.1.4
Internet Explorer 6.0 included with Windows CE 5.0 Professional only
WordPad included with Windows CE 5.0 Professional only
ActiveSync
Open Tekterm
ANSI
TESS terminal emulations
IBM 3270, IBM 5250, HP 2392
Naurtech
MCL
MCC
PTX Connect
Stay-Linked
On-board IEEE 802.11b/g (CCX Certified)
On-board Bluetooth radio
Bar Code Applications
•
•
•
Optional 1D EV15 imager module.
Optional 1D SE955 laser scanner module
Optional 2D HHP 5000 imager module
7.2
NEO Radio Specifications
7.2.1
802.11b/g Radio
Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) and Orthogonal Frequency Division
Multiplexing (OFDM)
•
•
Form factor: Embedded surface mount module, 8.2 x 8.4 mm
Antenna port: U.FL jack
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
171
Chapter 7: Specifications
Bluetooth Radio
•
•
•
•
•
•
Antenna Type: PCB slot antenna
Antenna Gain: 2dBi peak
Transmit Power: 802.11b/g: 50 mW typical (+17 dBm)
Frequency Range: 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz
Channels: This radio supports 802.11d. The radio will associate with any 802.11d compliant AP, regardless of what channel is in use.
RX Sensitivity:
-86 dBm typ @ 11 Mbps
-82dBm @ 6 Mbps, -69 dBm @ 54 Mbps
•
Data Rates:
802.11g: 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps
802.11b: 1, 2, 5.5, 11 Mbps
•
EVM
802.11b: -28 dB typ (16%)
802.11g: -29 dB typ (13%)
•
7.2.2
Bluetooth Co-existence: 2-line hardware handshake with Bluetooth radio
Bluetooth Radio
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Form Factor: Embedded (920 kbps serial interface)
Bluetooth Version: Version 2.0 compliant – features Adaptive Frequency Hopping
(AFH) for better co-existence with 802.11 radio and Enhanced Data Rate (EDR) for up
to 3 Mbps data rate
Antenna Type: Ceramic chip PIFA
Antenna Gain: 1 dBi peak
Transmit Power: -3 dBm (0.5mW) minimum, +4 dBm (2.5 mW) max
Frequency Range: 2.400-2.4835 GHz
RX Sensitivity (BER<0.1%): -80 dBm max
Data Rate:
V1.2 = 732.2 kbps and 57.6 kbps asymmetric, 433.9 kbps symmetric
V2.0 = 2 & 3Mbps
•
172
802.11 Co-existence: 2-line hardware handshake with 802.11 radio
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 7: Specifications
Scanner/Imager Specifications
7.3
Scanner/Imager Specifications
7.3.1
SE 955HP Specifications
Scan Angle
47° ± 3° default / 35° ± 3° reduced
Scan Rate
104 (± 12) scans/sec (bi-directional)
Scan Pattern
Linear
Wavelength
650nm
Input Voltage
3.0-5.5 VDC ± 10%
Input Current
65 mA typical
Standby Current
8 µA max
Operating Temperature
-20° to 60° C
-4° to 140°F
Print Contrast
Minimum 25% absolute dark/light reflectance measured at 650 nm
Dimensions
1.21 cm H x 2.16 cm W x 1.55 cm (max)
0.47 in. H x 0.85 in. W x 0.61 in. D (max)
Symbologies
UPC/EAN, Code 128, Code 39, Code 93, I 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5,
Codabar, MSI Plessey
7.3.1.1 SE 955HP Decode Zone
Decode Zone Typical
4 mil
1.0 in. – 5.5 in. / 2.54 cm – 13.97 cm
5 mil
1.25 in. – 8 in. / 3.18 cm – 20.32 cm
7.5 mil
1.5 in. – 13.25 in. / 3.81 cm – 33.66 cm
10 mil
1.5 in. – 17.5 in. / 3.81 cm – 44.45 cm
UPC 100%
1.5 in. – 23.5 in. / 3.81 cm – 59.69 cm
15 mil
1.5 in. – 29.5 in. / 3.81 cm – 74.93 cm
20 mil
1.75 in. – 35.5 in. / 4.45 cm – 90.17 cm
40 mil
* - 40 in. / * - 101.6 cm
55 mil
* - 55 in. / * - 139.7 cm
* dependent on width of bar code
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
173
Chapter 7: Specifications
EV15 Imager Specifications
7.3.2
EV15 Imager Specifications
Parameter
Light Source
Scan Angle
Minimum Print
Contrast
Min x. Dimension
Reading Distance
Symbologies
Ambient Light
Shock
Vibration
Specification
617nm Highly Visible LED
40º
Minimum 25%
0.1 mm (4 mils)
Up to 90cm (35 in)
UPC (E&A), EAN, RSS, Code 39, Code 128, UCC/EAN 128,
ISBN, ISBT, Interleaved, Matrix, Industrial and Standard 2 of 5,
Codabar, Code 93/93i, Code 11, MSI, Plessey, Telepen, PDF417,
Micro PDF417
Works in any lighting conditions, from 0 to 100,000 lux
2000G, 0.7ms, half sinus, 3 axes
50G r.m.s
7.3.2.1 EV15 Imager Decode Zone
0 Lux to 100,000 Lux
Mil Size
Minimum Range
Maximum Range
Inches
Inches
5
2.5
7
10
3
14
UPC
2
14.5
20
2.5
22
40
3
35.5
High quality symbols in normal room light.
7.3.3
HHP 5000 Imager Performance
Specification
Image Sensor
174
HHP 5000
752H x 480 CMOS sensor
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 7: Specifications
HHP 5000 Imager Performance
Motion Tolerance
4 in. (10.2 cm) per second
Rotational Sensitivity
360°
Viewing Angle
±40°
Ambient light
Total darkness to 100,000 lux (full sunlight)
Illumination LEDs
626 nm ±30 nm
Aiming
LEDs: 526 nm ±30 nm
Laser: 650 nm ±10 nm
Symbologies supported
2D: PDF417, MicroPDF417, MaxiCode, Data Matrix, QR Code,
Aztec, Aztec Mesa, Code 49, UCC Composite
Linear: Code 39, Code 128, Codabar, UPC, EAN, Interleaved 2
of 5, RSS, Code 93, Codablock
Postal: Postnet (US), Planet Code, BPO 4 State, Canadian Post,
Japanese Post, KIX (Netherlands) Post
Size
1.78 cm Depth x 2.79 cm Width (without mounting tabs) x 1.21
cm Height
0.7 in. Depth x 1.1 in. Width (without mounting tabs) x 0.475 in.
Height
Weight
5.9 grams (.21 ounces)
Operational Input Voltage
Imager: 3.3 VDC ±5% (23°C)
Illumination + Aimer 5300: 3.0 VDC to 5.5 VDC (23°C)
Operating Temperature
-30° to +50°C (-34° to 122°F)
Storage Temperature
-40° to +70°C (-40° to 158°F)
Humidity
up to 95% RH, non-condensing at 122° F (50°C)
Shock
18 shocks of 3,500 G for 0.5 msec at 23°C (73° F)
7.3.3.1 HHP 5000 Decode Zone
Performance Focal Point
SR
7 inches (17.8 cm) from lens plate
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
175
Chapter 7: Specifications
HHP 5000 Imager Performance
SR Working
Range
176
8.3 mil
Linear
(.02 cm)
10 mil
PDF417
(.025 cm)
13 mil UPC 15 mil Data
Matrix
(.033 cm) (.038 cm)
15 mil QR 35 mil Maxicode
(.038 cm) (.089 cm)
Near
3.5 in.
(8.9 cm)
3.1 in.
(7.9 cm)
2.1 in.
(5.3cm)
2.3 in.
(5.8 cm)
2.1 in.
(7.9 cm)
2.0 in.
(5.1 cm)
Far
7.6 in.
(19.3cm)
9 in.
(22.9 cm)
13.2 in.
(33.5 cm)
10.2 in.
(25.9 cm)
8.8 in.
(22.4 cm)
13.0 in.
(33 cm)
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
APPENDIX
A
PINOUTS
A.1
Docking Connector Pinout
PIN #
Signal Name
Function
1
DGND
Ground
2, 3, 4
VDD_EXT_POWER
Power Input (6 VDC, 2.8 A)
5
BATT_OUT
Not Connected
6
AUDIO_N
Not Connected
7
AUDIO_P
Not Connected
8
VBUS_5V
USB Vbus (5 V @ 500 mA)
9
DOCK_ID
Dock Identifier
10
USB_DOCK_D-
USB Data Negative
11
USB_DOCK_D+
USB Data Positive
12
USB_DOCK_ID
USB Identifier
13
DGND
Ground
14
TXD
RS-232 Transmit Console Data
15
RXD
RS-232 Receive Console Data
16
DGND
Ground
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
A-1
Appendix A: Pinouts
Battery Connector
A.2
Battery Connector
PIN #
A.3
Signal Name
1
B-
Battery Negative
2
DQ
Bi-directional data (DS2762)
3
TH (GND)
Ground
4
B+
Battery Positive
5
PS
Power Switch Sensor
-
POLARITY TAB
6
B-
Battery Negative
Expansion Port Pinout
PIN #
A-2
DESCRIPTION
Signal Name
Function
1, 2, 5, 13, 14, 15, 16
DGND
Power Ground
3
USB-
USB Device port negative data
4
USB+
USB Device port positive data
6
EXP-~TRIG
Pistol Grip Trigger signal
7
EXP_~DETECT
Detection of installed device
8, 9, 10, 11, 12
SW_VSYS_PWR
Power Output (2.7-4.2VDC, 1A peak,
500mAh nominal) switched
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
APPENDIX
B
WIRELESS ZERO CONFIG
B.1
Wireless Information
Wireless Zero Config is the native Windows supplicant. To activate Wireless Zero
Config, refer to “Advanced Tab” on page 22.
•
Tap on Start>Settings>Network and Dial-up Connections.
•
Choose the radio icon representing the radio you want to set up – in the
sample screen in Figure B.1, this is labelled as SDIO86861
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
B-1
Appendix B: Wireless Zero Config
Wireless Information
Figure B.1 802.11 Wireless LAN Settings Window
•
Wireless Statistics Tab: When you choose the Wireless LAN icon, an 802.11 Wireless
LAN Settings window is displayed. This tab lists your radio statistics. Choosing the
Zero button resets the statistics of the last four items – Packets IN, Packets OUT, IN
errors and OUT errors.
Figure B.2 Wireless Statistics
•
B-2
Wireless Information Tab: This tab displays existing networks to which you can connect, and it allows you to add a new network or modify the settings for an existing
network.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix B: Wireless Zero Config
Wireless Information
Note: Configure button – To change the settings in an existing network, highlight the network you want to modify, and tap on the Configure button to display the Wireless
Properties dialog box.
Connect button – To force connection to a specific, existing network, highlight the
network to which you want NEO to connect, and tap on the Connect button
Figure B.3 Wireless Information Tab
This tab lists available networks – any access points that are broadcasting an SSID, and it
lists preferred networks – networks that you have configured. Since access points are generally secure, they will most likely not be listed here. By default, NEO attempts to connect to
preferred networks. This behaviour can be changed by enabling Automatically connect to
non-preferred networks in the Advanced dialog box (see Figure B.5).
•
•
To add a new configuration, tap on the Add New button. A blank Wireless Properties
dialog box is displayed.
Wireless Properties Tab: Type the appropriate SSID (Service Set Identifier) in the
Network name (SSID): dialog box. The Network name field can contain a maximum
of 32 characters. The name assigned here is listed as a preferred network.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
B-3
Appendix B: Wireless Zero Config
Wireless Information
Important: Keep in mind that NEO will only communicate with access points that are
configured with the same SSID.
B-4
•
Ad Hoc And Infrastructure: If you are using an Infrastructure network – one in which
NEOs must pass data through an access point – leave the checkbox next to This is an ad
hoc network blank.
If you are using an Ad Hoc network – a network in which NEOs pass data directly to
other Ad Hoc devices without an access point – add a checkmark in the checkbox next
to This is an ad hoc network to enable Ad Hoc.
•
Encryption:WEP (Wired-Equivalent Privacy) encryption prevents others from accidentally accessing your network. If you are not using encryption, you can choose Disabled
from the dropdown encryption menu. Otherwise, leave this field as is.
AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a standard for protecting data through encryption. AES supports key sizes of 128 bits, 192 bits and 256 bits and will serve as a
replacement for the Data Encryption Standard (DES), which has a key size of 56 bits. In
addition to the increased security that comes with larger key sizes, the AES algorithm is
a symmetric block cipher that can encrypt (encipher) and decrypt (decipher)
information.
•
Authentication: 802.11 supports four subtypes of network authentication services:
Open, Shared, WPA, and WPA-PSK. Under Open authentication, any wireless station
can request authentication. The station that needs to authenticate with another wireless
station sends an authentication management frame that contains the identity of the
sending station. The receiving station then sends back a frame that indicates whether it
recognizes the identity of the sending station.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix B: Wireless Zero Config
Wireless Information
Under Shared authentication, each wireless station is assumed to have received a secret
shared key over a secure channel that is independent from the 802.11 wireless network
communications channel.
Under WPA and WPA-PSK authentication, the use of 802.1x authentication is required.
For wireless networks without a Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service
(RADIUS) infrastructure, WPA supports the use of a preshared key. For wireless networks with a RADIUS infrastructure, Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) and
RADIUS is supported.
•
Network Key: This text box is used to specify a 5 or 13 ASCII character sequence or an
equivalent 10 or 26 Hexadecimal digit sequence that matches the active WEP key on the
access point.
To assign a Network key, highlight The key is provided automatically, and uncheck
the checkbox to disable this option.
Figure B.4 Network Key and Key Index
•
Key Index: This field is used to identify the WEP key.
Enter a value from 1 to 4.
•
Enable 802.1x authentication: 802.1X is the IEEE standard that offers additional security for local area networks. It provides authentication for user devices attached to an
Ethernet network, whether wired or wireless. A security protocol packet such as TLS or
MD5 encapsulated in an EAP is used in conjunction with the 802.1X standard to
authenticate users at the MAC layer. Available EAPs are listed in the dropdown menu
next to the EAP option.
To activate 802.1X, highlight 802.1x authentication, and check the checkbox.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
B-5
Appendix B: Wireless Zero Config
Assigning an IP Address
•
•
B.2
EAP Type (Extensible Authentication Protocol): This drop-down menu lists the EAP
types available on your system. The items in this drop-down menu will vary depending
on your network setup. Keep in mind also that some authentication protocols require
that you select a Certificate. By selecting the Properties button, you will be able to
select a Certificate. “Certificate Assignment” on page 102 provides a website that outlines how to create certificates for your network.
Saving and exiting the radio setup: Once you’ve completed the configuration, press
[ENTER], or tap on OK.
The connection you created will be listed in the Wireless Information tab as a preferred
network. The radio will search for the SSID and compare the WEP and authentication
information you specified. If there is a match between the hand-held settings and the
access point settings, the hand-held will communicate on the network through the
access point.
Assigning an IP Address
If your network is not using a DHCP server, you will need to assign an IP address. Refer to
“IP Address” on page 19 for details about assigning an IP address.
B.2.1
Name Server
Refer to “Name Server” on page 21 for details about this option.
B.2.2
Advanced Features
To display the Advanced Wireless Settings dialog box:
• Tap on the Advanced button in the Wireless Information tab. (Refer to Figure B.3.)
This window lists the available preferred networks.
B-6
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix B: Wireless Zero Config
Advanced Features
Figure B.5 Advanced Settings
B.2.2.1 Rearranging Preferred Networks
NEO attempts to connect with the networks listed in this dialog box in sequence, beginning
at the top of the list. If you need to rearrange this list of networks – move networks up and
down in the list:
•
•
Tap in the Networks List, and highlight the network that you want to move up or down
in the list.
To move the highlighted item in the list upward or downward, tap on the Down or Up
button.
B.2.2.2 Deleting a Preferred Network
To delete a network from this list:
•
•
In the preferred networks list, highlight the network you want to remove.
Tap on the Delete button.
B.2.2.3 Changing Network Properties
To change the properties of an existing preferred network:
•
•
•
Highlight the network that you want to modify.
Tap on the Properties button.
Make any necessary changes in the Wireless Properties dialog box, and press [ENTER]
to save the changes.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
B-7
APPENDIX
C
BAR CODE SETTINGS
C.1
Decoded (Internal) Scanners
•
C.1.1
Tap on the Scanner drop-down menu, and choose Decoded (internal).
Options
Dot Time (msec)
The value selected for Dot Time (msec) determines (in milliseconds) how long the
targeting dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you
can enter a value of 0 msec, 200 msec or 400 msec. A value of 0 (zero) disables
the target dot.
Laser On Time
The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on
when the scan button or trigger is pressed. Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value between 5 and 99, measured in
tenths of seconds.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
C-1
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Internal) – Advanced Options
C.1.2
Decoded (Internal) – Advanced Options
Scan Mode
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a
scanning mode: Scan beam only, Aim with Scan: 1 trigger pull, Aim with Scan: 2
trigger pulls, Aim with Scan on trigger release, and Continuous Scan Mode.
Aim Duration
This parameter determines the total time the aiming pattern appears before the scanner laser
begins sweeping. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which
you can enter a value from 0 to 30 (0 to 3 sec.). A value of 0 (zero) disables the aiming dot.
Minimum Cancel Time
The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is turned
off, once the scanner trigger or button is released. This gives the scanner a minimum amount
of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled when the user quickly
triggers on/off.
Power Mode
This parameter is a power-saving option. Tapping on it displays a screen listing two power
mode options: Continuous Power and Low Power.
In Continuous Power mode, the scanner is always on, waiting for a trigger pull or a serial
communication.
In Low Power mode, the scanner is in a standby state, drawing minimal power until a
trigger pull or serial communication wakes it. Keep in mind that while this option is more
suitable for battery powered applications, there will be a slight delay while the scanner
powers up to scan a bar code.
Low Power Timeout
To extend laser life, you can select the time the scanner remains active following a successful decode. The scanner wakes from low power mode when a bar code is scanned – a
successful decode restores normal blinking.
This is only used if the unit’s Trigger Mode has been changed to Continuous On and the unit
is in a fixed mount; otherwise, this parameter is not used.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a
value of 30 sec., 1 min., 2 min., or 3 min.
C-2
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Internal) – Advanced Options
Parameter Scanning
Setting this parameter to on allows the scanner to respond to programming bar codes that
can be found in the scanner manual. Scanning these is an alternative way to reprogram some
of the scanner features.
Important: Psion Teklogix strongly recommends that this parameter only be enabled by
personnel with a very strong understanding the scanner and how it operates.
Scanning the wrong parameter code can result in an inoperable unit; if this
occurs, the unit will need to be shipped to a depot for repair.
Linear Security Level
This parameter allows you to select the security level appropriate for your bar code quality.
There are four levels of decode security for linear code types (e.g., Code 39, Interleaved 2 of
5). Higher security levels should be selected for decreasing levels of bar code quality. As security levels increase, the scanner’s decode speed decreases.
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value from
1 to 4.
Linear security level 1 specifies that the following code types must be successfully read
twice before being decoded:
Code Type
Length
Codabar
All
MSI Plessey
4 or less
D 5 of 5
8 or less
I 2 of 5
8 or less
Linear security level 2 specifies that all types of codes must be successfully read twice
before being decoded.
Linear security level 3 specifies that code types other than the following must be successfully read twice before being decoded. The following codes must be read three times:
Code Type
Length
MSI Plessey
4 or less
D 2 of 5
8 or less
I 2 of 5
8 or less
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
C-3
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Internal) 2D Scanning Options
Linear security level 4 requires that all code types be successfully read three times before
being decoded.
Bi-Direction Redundancy
Note: This parameter is only valid if a” Linear Security Level” is enabled.
When this parameter is enabled, a bar code must be successfully scanned in both directions
(forward and reverse) before being decoded.
C.1.3
Decoded (Internal) 2D Scanning Options
Scanning Mode
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose
one of the following scanning modes: Smart Raster, Always Raster, Programmable
Raster, Slab Pattern, Cyclone Pattern or Semi-Omni Pattern.
Raster Height And Raster Expand Rate
These parameters determine the laser pattern’s height and rate of expansion.
Note: These parameters are only used when either Programmable Raster or
Always Raster is assigned to the “2D Scanning Mode” parameter. “2D Raster
Height” and “2D Raster Expand Rate” are intended for very specific applications
and are usually not required for normal scanning purposes.
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value from
1 to 15.
C.1.4
Decoded (Internal) Data Options
Transmit Code ID Char
A code ID character identifies the scanned bar code type. In addition to any single character
prefix already selected, the code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the
decoded symbol.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a
transmit code: None, AIM, or Symbol.
C-4
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Code 39
Scan Data Format
This parameter allows you to change the scan data transmission format. Double-tapping on
Scan Data Format displays the following options from which you can choose a data format:
data (as-is), data [S1], data [S2], data [S1][S2], [P] data, [P] data [S1], [P] data [S2], and
[P] data [S1][S2].
Prefix [P], Suffix [S1] And Suffix [S2]
A prefix and/or one or two suffixes may be appended to scan data for use in data editing.
When you double-tap on these parameters, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter
a value from 0 to 255.
Delete Char Set ECIs
Setting this parameter to on enables the scanner to delete any escape sequences representing
Character Set ECIs – Extended Channel Interpretations (also known as GLIs) – from its
buffer before transmission.
When this parameter is enabled, the scanner transmits data from PDF417 and MicroPDF417
bar codes containing Character Set ECIs, even when the ECI Protocol is disabled.
ECI Decoder
Setting this parameter to on enables the scanner to interpret any Extended Channel Interpretations (ECIs) supported by the scanner. This parameter has no effect on symbols that were
not encoded using ECIs.
If this parameter is set to off and a symbol that was encoded using an ECI escape is scanned,
the scanner transmits the ECI escape followed by the data that was not interpreted.
C.1.5
Code 39
Enabled
Setting this parameter to on enables Code 39.
Enable Trioptic Code 39
Note: “Trioptic Code 39” and “Full ASCII” should not be enabled simultaneously. The
scanner does not automatically discriminate between these two symbologies.
Trioptic Code 39 symbols always contain six characters. Setting this parameter to on allows
this type of symbology to be recognized.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
C-5
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Code 39
Convert To Code 32
Note: “Code 39” must be enabled in order for this parameter to function.
Setting this parameter to on allows the scanner to convert the bar code from Code 39 to
Code 32.
Code 32 Prefix
Note: “Convert to Code 32” must be enabled in order for this parameter to function.
When this parameter is enabled, the prefix character A is added to all Code 32 bar codes.
Set Length L1 And Set Length L2
Lengths for Code 39 can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One discrete
length or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e.,
human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where
you can define the code length that will be decoded by your scanner
Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected
length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing
two selected lengths. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a
specified range from 1 to 55.
Check Digit Verification
When this parameter is enabled, the integrity of a Code 39 symbol is checked to ensure that
it complies with specified algorithms.
Note: Only those “Code 39” symbols that include a Mod 43 check digit are decoded when
this parameter is enabled.
C-6
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Code 39
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Full ASCII
If this parameter is enabled, the characters +, %, and / are used as escape characters. The
combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent
ASCII character.
Decode Performance
If this parameter is enabled, one of three decode levels can be chosen in the Decode Performance Level parameter.
Decode Perf. Level
This parameter provides three levels of decode performance or “aggressiveness” for Code
39 symbols. Increasing the performance level reduces the amount of required bar code orientation – this is useful when scanning very long and/or truncated bar codes. Keep in mind
that increased levels reduce decode security.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a
decode performance level of between 1 and 3.
Length Restriction
The parameters in this sub-menu allow you to define the length of the bar codes that will be
decoded using either the Field Size parameter or the Minimum Size and Maximum Size parameters (see below). The order of operation to either match the Field Size or determine if
the length falls between the Minimum Size and Maximum Size is as follows:
•
•
•
Strip the leading and trailing characters.
Add the prefix and suffix characters.
Count the number of characters remaining to either match the field size or determine if
the length falls between the minimum and maximum size.
Field Size
When a value is assigned for this parameter, only bar codes that match the field size exactly
can be transmitted. If a value is assigned to this parameter, a Minimum Size and Maximum
Size value is not required.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
C-7
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Code 128
Minimum Size And Maximum Size
When a value is assigned to these parameters, only bar code lengths that fall between the
minimum and maximum value can be decoded. If values are assigned to these parameters, a
Field Size value is not required.
Add/Remove Data
Prefix Char
This character, if non-zero, is added before a successfully decoded bar code. Press the key
you want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter. The ASCII/Unicode key
value of the keypress is displayed.
Suffix Char
This character, if non-zero, is added after a successfully decoded bar code. Press the key you
want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter. The ASCII/Unicode key value of
the keypress is displayed.
Strip Leading
This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the beginning of the bar code before the prefix character is added.
Note: For Code 39 bar codes, the “AIAG Strip” is performed before the “Strip Leading”.
Strip Trailing
The value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be
removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added.
C.1.6
Code 128
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable Code 128.
Enable GS1-128/GS1 US
Previously named UPC/EAN and UCC, these types of bar codes include group separators
and start codes.
Enable ISBT 128
To successfully scan this variation, Enable ISBT 128 must be set to on.
C-8
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
EAN 13
Decode Performance
If this parameter is set to on, one of three decode levels assigned to the Decode Performance
Level parameter can be selected.
Decode Perf. Level
This parameter provides three levels of decode performance or “aggressiveness” for Code
128 symbols. Increasing the performance level reduces the amount of required bar code orientation – this is useful when scanning very long and/or truncated bar codes. Keep in mind
that increased levels reduce decode security.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a
decode performance level of between 1 and 3.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-7 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C.1.7
EAN 13
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable EAN 13.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C.1.8
EAN 8
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable EAN 8.
EAN-8 Zero Extend
When this parameter is enabled, five leading zeros are added to decoded EAN-8 symbols,
making them compatible in format to EAN-13 symbols. Disabling this parameter returns
EAN-8 symbols to their normal format.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
C-9
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
UPC A
C.1.9
UPC A
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable UPC A.
UPC-A Check Digit
If you enable this parameter, the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.
UPC-A Preamble
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed where you can choose one
of three options for lead-in characters for UPC-A symbols transmitted to the host device:
System Char – system character transmitted with the data,
Country Code and System Char – both the country code (“0” for USA) and system character are transmitted with the data, or
None – no preamble is transmitted. The lead-in characters are considered part of the symbol.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page 8 for details.
C.1.10
UPC E
Enable UPC-E
Set this parameter to on to allow UPC E bar code scans.
Enable UPC-E1
Set this parameter to on to allow UPC-E1 (zero suppressed) bar code scans.
UPC-E and UPC-E1 Check Digit
If you enable one or both of these parameters, a check digit is included with the decoded bar
code data.
UPC-E and UPC-E1 Preamble
When you double-tap on one of these parameters, a dialog box is displayed where you can
choose one of three options for lead-in characters for UPC-E and UPC-E1 symbols transmitted to the host device:
System Char – system character transmitted with the data,
C-10
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
UPC/EAN Shared Settings
Country code and System Char – both the country code (“0” for USA) and system character are transmitted with the data, or
None – no preamble is transmitted. The lead-in characters are considered part of the symbol.
Conv. UPC-E to UPC-A
This parameter converts UPC-E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format before
transmission. After conversion, data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit).
Conv. UPC-E1 to UPC-A
This parameter converts UPC-E1 (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format before
transmission. After conversion, data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit).
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C.1.11
UPC/EAN Shared Settings
The parameters you set here are a shared across all available UPC and EAN bar codes.
Enable Bookland EAN
Setting this parameter to on allows your scanner to recognize Bookland EAN bar codes.
Supplementals
Supplementals are additionally appended characters (2 or 5).
Double-tapping this parameter displays a list of options. If Ignore is chosen, UPC/EAN is
decoded and the supplemental characters are ignored. If Decode is chosen, UPC/EAN
symbols are decoded with supplementals. Autodiscriminate works in conjunction with the
Supp. Redundancy parameter.
Supp. Redundancy
With Autodiscriminate selected in the Supplementals parameter, Supp. Redundancy adjusts
the number of times a symbol without supplementals is decoded before transmission.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog is displayed in which you can enter a value
between 2 and 20. A value of 5 or above is recommended when Autodiscriminate is selected
and you are decoding a mix of UPC/EAN symbols with and without supplementals.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
C-11
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Code 93
Security Level
This parameter controls the tolerance for decoding edge-to-edge UPC/EAN bar codes.
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can choose a level
from 0 to 3. Lower values have a lower tolerance for misreads, but they also increase the
time it takes to decode the bar code.
Linear Decode
Linear Decode applies to code types containing two adjacent blocks (e.g., UPC-A, EAN-8,
EAN-13). When enabled, a bar code is transmitted only when both the left and right blocks
are successfully decoded within one laser scan. This option should be enabled when bar
codes are in proximity to each other.
2D UPC Half Block Stitching
Setting this parameter to on enables UPC Half Block Stitching for the omnidirectional
scanner engine only.
C.1.12
Code 93
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 93”, or off to disable it.
Set Length L1 and Set Length L2
Lengths for Code 93 can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One discrete length
or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e.,
human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where
you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those bar codes of a specified
length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to specify two lengths of bar codes that
may be decoded. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from 4 to 55.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-7 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C-12
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Codabar
C.1.13
Codabar
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Codabar”.
Set Length L1 And Set Length L2
Lengths for “Codabar” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One discrete
length or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e.,
human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where
you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those bar codes of a specified
length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to specify two lengths of bar codes that
may be decoded. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from 5 to 55.
CLSI Editing
When enabled, this parameter strips the start and stop characters and inserts a space after the
first, fifth, and tenth characters of a 14-character Codabar symbol.
Note: Symbol length does not include start and stop characters.
NOTIS Editing
When enabled, this parameter strips the start and stop characters from decoded
Codabar symbol.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-7 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C.1.14
MSI Plessey
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable MSI Plessey.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
C-13
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
MSI Plessey
Set Length L1 and Set Length L2
Set Length L1 And Set Length L2
Lengths for MSI Plessey can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One discrete
length or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e.,
human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where
you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those bar codes of a specified
length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to specify two lengths of bar codes that
may be decoded. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from 6 to 55.
Check Digits
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can choose One or
Two check digit(s).
If this parameter is set to One, it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit. If “Check
Digits” is set to Two, it is assumed that the last two digits are check digits.
Note: If Two check digits is selected, an MSI Plessey “Check Digit Algorithm” must also
be selected. See below for details.
Transmit Check Digit
If this parameter is enabled, the check digit is included with the bar code data.
Check Digit Algorithm
When the Two MSI Plessey check digits option is selected, an additional verification is required to ensure integrity. Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which
you can choose the algorithm to be used: MOD 10/MOD 11 or MOD 10/MOD 10.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-7 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C-14
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Interleaved 2 of 5
C.1.15
Interleaved 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Interleaved 2 of 5”.
Set Length L1 and Set Length L2
Lengths for “Interleaved 2 of 5” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One
discrete length or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where
you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those bar codes of a specified
length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to specify two lengths of bar codes that
may be decoded. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from 4 to 14.
Check Digit Verification
When enabled, this parameter checks the integrity of an I 2 of 5 symbol to ensure it complies
with a specified algorithm – either USS (Uniform Symbology Specification) or
OPCC (Optical Product Code Council).
Transmit Check Digit
If this parameter is enabled, the check digit is included with the bar code data.
Convert to EAN 13
If this parameter is enabled, the I 2 of 5 bar code is converted to EAN 13.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-7 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C.1.16 GS1 DataBar
All GS1 DataBar bar codes encode a GTIN-12 or GTIN-13 in a 14-digit data structure. In
order to make the GTIN-12 or GTIN-13 a 14-digit data structure, a leading zero or zeros is
filled to the left of the GTIN.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
C-15
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Discrete 2 of 5
Enable GS1 DataBar Omni, Expanded & Limited
GS1 DataBar Omni and GS1 DataBar Expanded have omnidirectional scanning capability. GS1 DataBar Limited can only be scanned by a linear hand-held scanning device.
They cannot be scanned by omnidirectional scanners. Each of these options can be turned
on or off depending on the scanner installed in your hand-held.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-7 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C.1.17
Discrete 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Discrete 2 of 5”.
Set Length L1 and Set Length L2
Lengths for “Discrete 2 of 5” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One discrete length or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of
characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where
you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those bar codes of a specified
length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to specify two lengths of bar codes that
may be decoded. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from 1 to 12.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-7 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C-16
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Composite
C.1.18
Composite
Important: To successfully read this type of bar code, the two types of symbologies
included in a composite bar code must be enabled. In addition, “Center Bar
Code Only” must be disabled.
A composite symbol includes multi-row 2D components making it compatible with linear
and area CCD scanners along with linear and rastering laser scanners.
The options available for this parameter represent multi-level components of a
composite symbol.
Enable CC-C and Enable CC-AB
To activate these components, set these parameters to on.
Enable TLC-39
This composite component integrates MicroPDF417 with the linear code. Setting this parameter to on enables this parameter.
C.1.19
PDF-417
Enable
Setting this parameter to on enables PDF-417 two dimensional (2D) coding.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-7 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C.1.20
Micro PDF-417
Enable
Setting this parameter to ‘on’ enables Micro PDF-417 bar code scanning. Micro PDF-417 is
a multi-row symbology that is useful for applications requiring greater area efficiency but
lower data capacity than PDF-417.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
C-17
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (ISCP)
Code 128 Emulation
When this parameter is enabled, the scanner transmits data from certain Micro PDF-417
symbols as if it was encoded in Code 128 symbols.
If Code 128 Emulation is enabled, the following Micro PDF-417 symbols are transmitted
with one of the following prefixes:
]C1 - if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915
]C2 - if the first codeword is 908 or 909
]C0 - if the first codeword is 910 or 911
If Code 128 Emulation is set to off, the Micro PDF-417 symbols are transmitted with one of
the following prefixes:
]L3 - if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915
]L4 - if the first codeword is 908 or 909
]L5 - if the first codeword is 910 or 911
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-7 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C.2
Decoded (ISCP)
•
C-18
Tap on the Scanner drop-down menu, and choose Decoded (ISCP).
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (ISCP) – Options
C.2.1
Decoded (ISCP) – Options
Laser On Time
The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the
scan button or trigger is pressed.
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value
between 1 and 10 seconds.
C.2.2
Decoded (ISCP) – Advanced Options
Continuous Scan Mode
Setting this parameter to on keeps the laser on and continuously decoding as long as the
scanner button is pressed and held down.
Minimum Cancel Time
The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is turned
off, once the scanner trigger or button is released. This gives the scanner a minimum amount
of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled when the user quickly
triggers on/off.
Low Power Timeout
To extend laser life, you can select the length of time the scanner remains active following a
successful decode. The scanner wakes from low power mode when a bar code is scanned – a
successful decode restores normal blinking.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a
value of 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min, or 3 min.
Note: This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to Continuous On and
the hand-held is mounted in a fixed position; otherwise, ‘Low Power Timeout’ is
not used.
Parameter Scanning
Setting this parameter to Enabled allows decoding of parameter bar codes.
Same Read Validate
The data is only transmitted after repeated reads give the same result. The value assigned at
this parameter determines the number of reads required, from 0 to 10 times.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
C-19
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Code 39
Same Read Timeout
This option prevents the same bar code from being read more than once. The value assigned
determines after what time period the scanner will timeout, from 0 to 2550 msec.
Diff Read Timeout
Prevents unwanted reading of other bar codes on the same label. The value assigned determines after what time period the scanner will timeout, from 0 to 2550 msec.
Add AIM ID Prefix
The AIM ID (Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility) is an international bar
code identifier. When this parameter is enabled, the AIM ID is inserted at the beginning of
the decoded bar code.
Aim Duration
This parameter determines the total time the aiming pattern appears before the scanner laser
begins sweeping. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which
you can enter a value from 0 to 2550 milliseconds. A value of 0 (zero) disables the aiming
dot.
C.2.3
Code 39
Enable
Setting this parameter to on enables Code 39.
Full ASCII
If this parameter is enabled, the characters +, %, and / are used as escape characters. The
combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent
ASCII character.
Reading Range
Determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully scanned. The
default setting, Extended, allows for increased reading distance.
Start/Stop Transmit
Setting this parameter to on enables the transmission of start and stop characters, which are
usually not transmitted. Code 39 can start and end with either a * or a $ character (see also
the next parameter).
C-20
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Code 128
Accepted Start Char
This parameter allows the user the option of using one of the two start/stop characters or
both ($ char, * char, $ and * char).
Check Digit Verification
Uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity of the
symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the data is not
transmitted. The available options are: Disabled, MOD 43 Check, French CIP, or
Italian CIP.
Note: French CIP (French pharmaceutical) is only used with bar codes containing
7 characters.
Italian CIP (Italian pharmaceutical) is also known as Code 32. It is transmitted as a
standard Code 39 if checksum is not validated.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-7 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C.2.4
Code 128
Enable
Setting this parameter to on enables Code 128.
GS1-128
GS1-128 is the GS1 implementation of the Code 128 barcode specification. The former
correct name was UCC/EAN-128.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
C-21
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Code 128
GS1-128 Identifier
GS1-128 Identifier allows the AIM ID " ‘ for EAN 128 to be transmitted or removed. By default, this identifier is transmitted if EAN 128 is enabled.
GTIN Compliant
GTIN (global trade item number) processing transmits EAN 128 as the 14-character
EAN/UCC GTIN. To use GTIN processing, you must activate the EAN 128 symbology.
Important: When EAN 128 and GTIN processing are both activated, it is not possible
to read normal EAN 128 Codes.
FNC1 Conversion
FNC1 Conversion allows the FNC1 character to be converted to another character for applications that cannot use the default <GS> Group Separator or hex (1d).
Double-tapping on this option displays a dialog box listing the allowable range: 0 to 255.
Enable ISBT 128
To successfully scan this type of bar code (International Society of Blood Transfusion), this
option must be set to on. If you enable this type of bar code, Code 128/EAN 128 is deactivated to avoid any confusion.
ISBT Concat Transmit
The codes are not concatenated by default. You need to choose one of the options provided
for this parameter to send concatenated code. Choosing Only Concatenated Codes transmits only concatenated codes – single codes will not be transmitted. Choosing
Concatenated or Single transmits single codes or concatenated codes. If only one code of a
pair is read, that code will be transmitted as a single code. If both codes in a pair are detected, they will be concatenated provided that ISBT Concat Any Pair (see below) is
enabled.
ISBT Concat Any Pair
Enabling this parameter causes all code pairs that can be, to be concatenated even if they do
not comply with Section 4.1 of the “ISBT 128 Bar Code Symbology and Application Specification for Labeling of Whole Blood and Blood Components” (June 2000, Version 1.2.1).
Reading Range
Determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully scanned. The
default setting, Extended, allows for increased reading distance.
C-22
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
EAN 13 Settings
Check Digit Verification
The available options for this parameter are Disabled or French CIP. This parameter uses
the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data
before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the data is not transmitted.
Note: French CIP (French pharmaceutical) is only used with bar codes containing
7 characters.
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-7 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C.2.5
EAN 13 Settings
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable EAN 13.
ISBN Conversion
When this parameter (International Standard Book Number) is enabled, the first 3 characters
(‘978’) are ignored and the checksum (0.9, ‘X’) is calculated on the remaining characters.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C.2.6
EAN 8
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable EAN 8.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
C-23
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
UPC A
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Convert to EAN 13
If this parameter is enabled, an EAN 8 bar code is converted to EAN 13.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C.2.7
UPC A
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable UPC A bar code scanning recognition.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Transmit Number System
If this parameter is enabled, the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded bar
code data.
Convert to EAN 13
If this parameter is enabled, a UPC A bar code is converted to EAN 13.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C.2.8
UPC E
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “UPC E”.
Enable UPC-E1
Set this parameter to on to allow UPC-E1 (zero suppressed) bar code scans.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
C-24
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
UPC/EAN Shared Settings
Transmit Number System
If this parameter is enabled, the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded bar
code data.
Convert to UPC-A
This parameter converts UPC E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC A format before
transmission. After conversion, data follows UPC A format and is affected by UPC A programming selections (e.g. Check Digit).
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C.2.9
UPC/EAN Shared Settings
The setting assigned to the Addendum parameter associated with this option is shared across
all UPC and EAN bar codes.
Addendum
An addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code. This parameter
provides two options: Not Required but Transmitted if Read or Required and
Transmitted.
• Double-tap on Addendum to display a dialog box listing your options.
• Highlight an item, and tap on OK.
When Addendum is set to Not Required but Transmitted if Read, the scanner searches for
an addendum and if one exists, appends it to the main bar code. When the parameter is set to
Required and Transmitted, the scanner does not accept the main bar code without
an addendum.
Addendum Add-on 2 and Addendum Add-on 5
Enabling these parameters sets the length of the addendum bar code to either 2 or
5 characters.
GTIN Compliant
GTIN (global trade item number) processing transmits EAN 128 as the 14-character
EAN/UCC GTIN. To use GTIN processing, you must activate the EAN 128 symbology.
Important: When EAN 128 and GTIN processing are both activated, it is not possible
to read normal EAN 128 Codes.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
C-25
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Code 93
Reading Range
This parameter determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully
scanned. The default setting, Extended, allows for increased reading distance.
C.2.10
Code 93
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable Code 93.
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-7 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C.2.11
Codabar
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable Codabar.
Start/Stop Transmit
Codabar can use the following sets of characters as start and stop characters:
a, b, c, d
A, B, C, D
a, b, c, d, /, t, n, *, e
DC1, DC2, DC3, DC4
Thus, when a set is chosen, the first and last digits of a Codabar message must be one of
those characters and the body of the message should not contain these characters. Setting
this parameter to Not Transmitted strips the start and stop characters from this bar code.
CLSI Library System
When enabled, spaces are inserted after characters 1, 5, 10 in the 14-character label (used in
the USA by libraries using the CLSI system).
C-26
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
MSI Plessey
Check Digit Verification
When enabled, this parameter checks the integrity of a symbol to ensure it complies with a
specified algorithm – either USS (Uniform Symbology Specification) or OPCC (Optical
Product Code Council).
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Set Length L1, Set Length L2, and Set Length L3
Lengths for Codabar can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to the number of
characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes where you can define the code
length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Length Mode
You can choose to set L1 as Minimum Length or L1, L2, L3 as Fixed Length.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-7 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C.2.12
MSI Plessey
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable MSI.
Enable Plessy
Set this parameter to on to enable Plessy.
Check Digit Verification
The available options for this parameter are MOD 10 Check and Double MOD 10 Check.
This parameter uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the
data is not transmitted.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
C-27
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Code 11
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Plessy Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the Plessy data, this parameter must be enabled.
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Plessy Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the Plessy bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code
refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-7 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C.2.13
Code 11
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable Code 11.
Check Digit Verification
The available options for this parameter are MOD 10 Check and Double MOD 10
Check.This parameter uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the
integrity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm,
the data is not transmitted.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
C-28
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Interleaved 2 of 5
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-7 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C.2.14
Interleaved 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable Interleaved 2 of 5.
Reading Range
This parameter determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully
scanned. The default setting, Extended, allows for increased reading distance.
Check Digit Verification
The available options for this parameter are Disabled, MOD 10 Check and French CIP.
Check Digit Verification uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure
the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the data is not transmitted.
Note: French CIP (French pharmaceutical) is only used with bar codes containing
7 characters.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Set Length L1, Set Length L2, and Set Length L3
Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to the
number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes where you can define the code
length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Length Mode
You can chose to set L1 as Minimum Length or L1, L2, L3 as Fixed Length.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-7 for details.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
C-29
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Matrix 2 of 5
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C.2.15
Matrix 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable Matrix 2 of 5.
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-7 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C.2.16 Discrete 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable Discrete 2 of 5.
Standard 2 of 5 Format
This parameter allows you to choose a standard format – either Identicon (6 start/stop bars)
or Computer Identics (4 start/stop bars).
Check Digit Verification
The available options for this parameter are Disabled and MOD 10 Check. Check Digit
Verification uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity
of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the data is
not transmitted.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Set Length L1, Set Length L2, and Set Length L3
Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to the
number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
C-30
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Telepen
Double-tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes where you can define the code
length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Length Mode
You can chose to set L1 as Minimum Length or L1, L2, L3 as Fixed Length.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-7 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C.2.17 Telepen
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable Telepen.
Format
This parameter allows you to set the bar code character format to either ASCII or Numeric.
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-7 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C.2.18 GS1 DataBar
All GS1 DataBar bar codes encode a GTIN-12 or GTIN-13 in a 14-digit data structure. In
order to make the GTIN-12 or GTIN-13 a 14-digit data structure, a leading zero or zeros is
filled to the left of the GTIN.
Enable GS1 DataBar Omni, Expanded & Limited
GS1 DataBar Omni and GS1 DataBar Expanded have omnidirectional scanning capability.
GS1 DataBar Limited can only be scanned by a linear hand-held scanning device. They
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
C-31
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Composite
cannot be scanned by omnidirectional scanners. Each of these options can be turned on or
off depending on the scanner installed in your hand-held.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-7 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C.2.19 Composite
Important: To successfully read this type of bar code, the two types of symbologies
included in a composite bar code must be enabled. In addition, “Center Bar
Code Only” must be disabled.
A composite symbol includes multi-row 2D components making it compatible with linear
and area CCD scanners along with linear and rastering laser scanners.
The options available for this parameter represent multi-level components of a
composite symbol.
Enable CC-C and Enable CC-AB
To activate these components, set these parameters to on.
Linear Transmission Only
When Linear Transmission Only is enabled, only the linear code portion of the composite
bar code is transmitted when scanned.
UPC-EAN Composite Message
This option allows you to choose how UPC-EAN shared bar codes are transmitted: Always
Linked, Never Linked or Auto-discriminate.
C.2.20 TLC-39
Enable
Setting this parameter to on enables TLC-39 scanning capability.
C-32
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
PDF-417
Linear Transmission Only
When Linear Transmission Only is enabled, only the linear code portion of the composite
bar code is transmitted when scanned.
Security Level
This parameter is used to differentiate between TLC-39 and standard Code 39. Tapping on
Security Level displays a dialog box in which you can assign a value from 0 to 100. The
higher the value assigned, the lower the decode rate.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-7 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C.2.21 PDF-417
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable PDF-417.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-7 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C.2.22 Micro PDF-417
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable Micro PDF-417.
Code 128 Emulation
When this parameter is enabled, the scanner transmits data from certain Micro PDF-417
symbols as if it was encoded in Code 128 symbols.
If Code 128 Emulation is enabled, the following Micro PDF-417 symbols are transmitted
with one of the following prefixes:
]C1 if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915
]C2 if the first codeword is 908 or 909
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
C-33
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Codablock
]C0 if the first codeword is 910 or 911
If Code 128 Emulation is set to off, the Micro PDF-417 symbols are transmitted with one of
the following prefixes:
]L3 if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915
]L4 if the first codeword is 908 or 909
]L5 if the first codeword is 910 or 911
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-7 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C.2.23 Codablock
Codablock is a stacked variant to the standard bar codes Code 39 and Code 128.
Enable Codablock A
Codablock A is based on the structure of the Code 39. In 2 to 22 lines, 2 to 61 characters
(max 1340 characters) are encoded. Set this parameter to on to enable this option.
Enable Codablock F
Codablock F is a stacked bar code symbology based on Code 128. In 2 to 44 lines each, 4 to
62 characters (max 2725) are encoded. Set this parameter to on enable this option.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-7 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-8 for details.
C-34
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
APPENDIX
D
TEKLOGIX IMAGERS APPLET
The Teklogix Imagers applet is used to create, modify, delete, and activate imager
settings. The principal uses of the application are to decode bar codes and to
capture images. A Demonstration Application is provided to demonstrate how the
imager works. Refer to “Imager Demo Applet” on page 134 for details.
D.1
Required Applets
In order to configure imaging, the Manage Triggers applet must be present in the
Control Panel, along with the Teklogix Imagers applet.
D.2
Presets
There are two methods that can be used to configure an imager using the Teklogix
Imagers applet:
•
•
Use a predefined preset.
Create a custom preset based on a predefined preset.
Important: It is strongly recommended that a predefined preset is used
whenever possible. Each predefined preset contains a coherent
group of settings that are known to work together in the intended
environment. In almost all situations, at least one of the predefined presets results in a satisfactory outcome.
A preset is a group of exposure and image correction settings. Each preset configures the imager for a specific purpose such as bar code decoding or image capture.
Presets also allow easier and faster configuration of the imager after power-on or
resume from suspend.
The predefined presets are generic and satisfy most user requirements. A custom
preset can be created for a specific user application, such as: include only
specified bar codes, read only a specified number of bar codes or for reading
unusual media.
Every preset belongs to a preset type. The following preset types are available:
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
D-1
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Predefined Presets
• Imaging for photo capture.
• Imaging for bar code decoding.
• Symbology selection.
At any time, only one preset of each type can be designated as the user-selected
active preset.
D.2.1
Predefined Presets
Predefined presets are built into the imaging software and cannot be changed. The predefined presets allow you to use the imager to perform specified tasks without having to
understand and set numerous variables. In almost all cases these predefined presets
are sufficient.
D.2.2
Bar Code Predefined Presets
These presets encompass the majority of the most popular bar codes and their subtypes. The
bar code decoding symbology predefined presets define which bar codes can be decoded.
The bar code decoding camera predefined presets determine how the bar code images
are captured.
D.2.2.1
Bar Code Decoding Symbology Predefined Presets
The following presets select groups of similar bar codes for decoding.
Note: It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible.
Factory Default
This preset enables the decoding of frequently used bar codes.
My Default
This preset uses the Symbology Settings menu to define the preset. For details about the
Symbology Settings menu, refer to “Bar Coding Tab – Configuring Symbologies” on page
D-15.
All
This preset enables the decoding of all bar codes that the imager can decode.
Linear
This preset enables the decoding of all the 1D symbologies that the imager can decode.
D-2
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Bar Code Decoding Camera Predefined Presets
Linear and PDF417
This preset enables the decoding of all the 1D and PDF symbologies that the imager can
decode.
Matrix
This preset enables the decoding of all 2D symbologies that the imager can decode.
Postal
This preset enables the decoding of all the postal symbologies that the imager can decode.
D.2.3
Bar Code Decoding Camera Predefined Presets
The following presets enable successful bar code image capture in almost all conditions.
Note: It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible.
Default
This preset works in a wide range of conditions. It is optimized for a normal office lighting
(about 300 Lux).
Low light
This preset is designed for very dark conditions such as inside a warehouse where the lights
are kept low, or inside an unlit truck. This preset increases either the exposure time or the
gain.
Low power
This preset minimizes the use of the flash so as to conserve the battery power on the handheld.
Glossy surface
This preset minimizes the use of the flash so as to reduce reflection. This preset is used to
read bar codes that are behind glass, or inside the plastic window of an envelope.
D.2.4
Image Capture Predefined Presets
The following presets enable successful image capture in almost all conditions.
Note: It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
D-3
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Using the Teklogix Imagers Applet
Default
This preset works in a wide range of conditions. It is optimized for a normal office lighting
(about 300 Lux).
Motion
This preset uses a shorter exposure time so as to freeze motion.
Low light near
This preset is designed for dark conditions, it uses a longer exposure time and includes
the flash.
D.3
Using the Teklogix Imagers Applet
D.3.1
Configuring the Image Capture Presets
To configure the image capture presets, open the dialog box as follows:
•
•
Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel.
Tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon, and if it’s not already selected, tap on the
Imaging tab.
Figure D.1 Imaging Tab
D-4
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Selecting a Camera
This window lists all the presets, both predefined and custom. Presets are identified
as follows:
•
•
•
D.3.2
Predefined presets are marked as ‘R’ read-only.
Custom presets are marked as ‘RW’ read and write.
One preset – either predefined or custom – is marked as ‘A’ active.
Selecting a Camera
To select a camera:
•
•
D.3.3
Tap on the Camera Presets drop-down menu to view the camera options.
Choose a camera – specifically, Front Imager which is located at the top of the unit.
Setting the Active Preset
An active preset has an A to the right. To set an active preset:
•
D.3.4
Highlight the preset, and tap on the Activate button.
Viewing a Preset
To view the parameter settings in a preset:
• Highlight a preset, and tap on the View button.
The associated preset window is displayed.
•
Tap on the + sign to expand the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
D-5
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Creating a Custom Preset
D.3.5
Creating a Custom Preset
A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset – either a predefined preset or an existing custom preset. To create a custom preset:
• Highlight a preset, and tap on the Add button.
A screen like the sample below is displayed.
• Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box.
• Tap on OK to save your changes.
The preset list is displayed; the new custom preset appears at the end of the list. It is marked
as read and write (RW).
D.3.6
Modifying a Custom Preset
The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified. It is recommended that very few
changes be made to a custom preset. To ensure that it will work reliably, it should be as close
as possible to the original predefined preset. To change a parameter value:
•
D-6
Highlight the custom preset, and tap on the Edit button.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Modifying a Custom Preset
•
•
•
Tap on the + symbols to expand the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.
Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change.
For a parameter that can take a range of values:
- Highlight the parameter, and then press the [SPACE] key or double-click on
the parameter.
- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and
the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.
- Type a value in the field provided.
•
For a parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or
disabled:
- Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click on the
parameter. Either method toggles between the two available values.
•
When you’ve completed your edits, tap on OK.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
D-7
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Removing a Custom Preset
The parameter list is displayed; the new value for the changed parameter is shown.
•
D.3.7
Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes.
Removing a Custom Preset
• Highlight the custom preset you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button.
A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset.
•
D.4
Tap on Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation.
Configuring the Bar Code Decoding Camera Presets
To configure the bar code decoding camera presets:
•
•
Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel>Teklogix Imagers.
Tap on the Barcoding tab.
Figure D.2 Bar Code Presets
This window lists all the presets, both predefined and the custom. Presets are identified
as follows:
•
•
D-8
Predefined presets are marked as read-only. For a description, review “Predefined Presets” on page D-2.
Predefined presets are marked as ‘R’ read-only.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Selecting a Camera
•
•
Custom presets are marked as RW – read and write.
One preset – either predefined or custom – is marked as ‘A’ active.
Note: The top portion of the window displays the bar code decoding camera presets.
The top port of the window displays the bar code decoding camera presets.
D.4.1
Selecting a Camera
To select a camera:
•
•
D.4.2
Tap on the Camera Presets drop-down menu to view the camera options.
Choose a camera – specifically, Front Imager which is located at the top of the unit.
Setting the Active Preset
An active preset has an A to the right; in Figure D.3 on page 12, the active preset is Default.
To set an active preset:
•
D.4.3
Highlight the preset, and tap on the Activate button.
Viewing a Preset
To view the parameter settings in a preset:
• Highlight a preset, and tap on the View button.
The associated preset window is displayed.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
D-9
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Creating a Custom Preset
•
D.4.4
Tap on the + sign to expand one of the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.
Creating a Custom Preset
A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset – either a predefined preset or an existing custom preset. To create a custom preset:
• Highlight a preset, and tap on the Add button.
A screen like the sample following is displayed.
• Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box.
• Tap on OK to save your changes.
The preset list is displayed; the new custom preset appears at the end of the list. It is marked
as read and write.
D.4.5
Modifying a Custom Preset
The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified. It is recommended that very few
changes be made to a custom preset. To ensure that it will work reliably, it should be as close
as possible to the original predefined preset. To change a parameter value:
•
D-10
Highlight the custom preset, and tap on the Edit button.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Modifying a Custom Preset
•
•
•
Tap on the + symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings.
Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change.
For a parameter that can take a range of values:
- Highlight the parameter, and then press the [SPACE] key or double-click the
parameter.
- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and
the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.
- Type a value in the field provided.
•
For a parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or
disabled:
- Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click on the
parameter. Either method toggles between the two available values.
• When you’ve completed your edits, tap on OK.
The parameter list is displayed; the new value for the changed parameter is shown.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
D-11
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Removing a Custom Preset
•
D.4.6
Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes.
Removing a Custom Preset
• Highlight the custom preset you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button.
A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset.
•
D.4.7
Tap on Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation.
Configuring the Bar Code Decoding Symbologies
To configure the bar code decoding camera presets:
•
Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel>Teklogix Imagers.
•
Tap on the Barcoding tab.
Figure D.3 Viewing Bar Code Decoding Symbologies
D-12
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Setting the Active Preset
D.4.8
Setting the Active Preset
An active preset has an A to the right; in Figure D.3 on page 12, the active preset is Default.
To set an active preset:
•
D.4.9
Highlight the preset, and tap on the Activate button.
Viewing a Preset
To view the parameter settings in a preset:
• Highlight a preset, and tap on the View button.
The associated preset window is displayed.
•
Tap on the + sign to expand one of the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.
D.4.10 Creating a Custom Preset
A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset – either a predefined preset or an existing custom preset. To create a custom preset:
• Highlight a preset, and tap on the Add button.
A screen like the sample following is displayed.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
D-13
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Modifying a Custom Preset
• Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box.
• Tap on OK to save your changes.
The preset list is displayed; the new custom preset appears at the end of the list. It is marked
as read and write.
D.4.11 Modifying a Custom Preset
The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified. It is recommended that very few
changes be made to a custom preset. To ensure that it will work reliably, it should be as close
as possible to the original predefined preset. To change a parameter value:
D-14
•
Highlight the custom preset, and tap on the Edit button.
•
•
•
Tap on the + symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings.
Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change.
For a parameter that can take a range of values:
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Removing a Custom Preset
- Highlight the parameter, and then press the [SPACE] key or double-click the
parameter.
- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and
the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.
- Type a value in the field provided.
•
For a parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or
disabled:
- Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click on the
parameter. Either method toggles between the two available values.
• When you’ve completed your edits, tap on OK.
The parameter list is displayed; the new value for the changed parameter is shown.
•
Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes.
D.4.12 Removing a Custom Preset
• Highlight the custom preset you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button.
A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset.
•
Tap on Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation.
D.4.13 Bar Coding Tab – Configuring Symbologies
To view the Symbology Settings options:
• Tap on the Barcoding tab, tap on All and then double-tap the View button.
To edit a default preset, you must first activate it:
•
Tap on My Default, and tap on the Activate button – an A appears to the right of
My Default.
Once the preset is activated, you can enable or disable the bar codes the imager will read.
•
•
Highlight My Default in the Barcoding tab.
Double-tap on the Edit button.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
D-15
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Filter Tab – Manipulating Bar Code Data
None of the other bar code decoding predefined presets are changed.
D.4.13.1 Symbology Settings
Note: For descriptions of the bar code symbologies, review “Bar Code Symbologies –
Descriptions” on page D-20.
D.4.14 Filter Tab – Manipulating Bar Code Data
To configure rules for manipulating bar code data:
•
•
Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel.
Tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon, and then tap on the Filter tab.
D.4.14.1 Modifying a Bar Code Setting
The rules for manipulating data from selected bar code symbologies can be modified. To
change the settings for a symbology:
•
•
•
D-16
Tap on the + symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings.
Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change.
For a parameter that can take a range of values:
- Highlight the parameter, and then press the [SPACE] key or double-click the
parameter.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Translation Tab – Configuring Rules
- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and
the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.
- Type a value in the field provided.
•
For a parameter that takes a single character:
- Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click the parameter. The following screen is displayed:
•
When you’ve completed your edits, tap on OK.
D.4.15 Translation Tab – Configuring Rules
Translation rules enable the automatic processing of bar code data. Up to 10 cases can be defined, each consisting of up to 10 sequential rules.
Note: Changes made to the translations configuration using the Teklogix Scanner Control Panel program are synchronized with changes made here. Changes made in
either place affect both translation tables.
• Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel.
• Tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon, and then tap on the Translations tab.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
D-17
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Advanced Tab
For instructions on adding, editing, and removing translation rules, refer to “Translations
Tab” on page 140.
D.4.16 Advanced Tab
D.4.16.1 File Locations for Captured Images
To configure the location for saved images, open the dialog box as follows:
•
•
D-18
Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel.
Tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon, and then tap on the Advanced tab.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Advanced Tab
To define the location where imager files will be stored:
•
Tap on the File Location button.
•
•
•
Type the file Name, choose the Folder and file Type.
Choose the Location in which your files will be saved.
When you have completed all the changes, tap on the Save button.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
D-19
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Bar Code Symbologies – Descriptions
D.4.16.2 Configuring Triggers
Viewing the Trigger Configuration
The trigger on NEO is configured using the Manage Triggers applet. The Teklogix Imagers
applet provides a shortcut to the Manage Triggers applet.
•
•
In the Advanced tab, tap on the Trigger Control button.
To view all the triggers and the hardware devices that are configured to use them, tap in
the checkbox next to Show all modules.
Adding, Editing and Removing Triggers
For instruction about adding, editing and removing triggers, refer to “Manage Triggers” on
page 98.
D.5
Bar Code Symbologies – Descriptions
To view all symbologies available for the imager:
•
Tap on the Barcoding tab, and tap on All.
Note: Remember that if you want to edit the symbologies, the preset you want to
change must be active. Highlight the preset you want to edit, and tap on the
Activate button – an A is added at the far right of the preset. With the activated
preset highlighted, double-tap on the Edit button.
D-20
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Options
D.5.1
Options
Auto Retry On Failed Decode Enabled
Setting this parameter to on allows the imager to repeat the image capture attempt if the
initial attempt fails. The number of retries is dependent on the value assigned in the next parameter, Max Number of Auto Retry. If this parameter is set to off, the imager will only
attempt the image capture once.
Max Number of Auto Retry
The value assigned for this parameter governs the number of times the imager will attempt
to capture a bar code if the first attempt fails to a maximum of 99 times.
Decoder Timeout
This parameter determines the maximum time that the decoder will spend searching for a
bar code on a captured image. The value assigned here is dependent on the type of bar code
and quality of the image being captured. For example, the value may need to be increased to
compensate for larger bar codes with more data encoded or for poor quality images. On the
other hand, the value can be decreased for smaller, good quality images. The allowable
value ranges from 200 to 500 msec.
Single Target Mode Enabled
When this parameter is enabled, the decoder assumes that a single bar code exists in the
image and that it is located in the centre of the image.
Add AIM ID Prefix
The AIM ID (Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility) is an international bar
code identifier. When this parameter is enabled, the AIM ID is inserted at the beginning of
the decoded bar code.
D.5.2
Code 39
Enabled
Setting this parameter to on makes “Code 39” readable to the imager.
Full ASCII
If this parameter is enabled, the characters +, %, and / are used as escape characters. The
combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent
ASCII character.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
D-21
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Trioptic Code
Start/Stop Strip
“Code 39” has start/stop patterns that can be output as ASCII characters in the output data.
When Start/Stop Strip is enabled, start/stop characters are not output.
Check Char
When this parameter is enabled, before data is output, the “Code 39” symbol integrity is verified based on a parity character that must be present in the code. If the parity character is not
part of the code, the code is not output. Keep in mind the parity character may not be part of
your output setup; in this case, this parameter should be turned off.
Check Char Strip
If this parameter is set to on, check characters – if present – are not output.
Concatenation
When Concatenation is set to on, all decoded “Code 39” symbols with a SPACE as the first
data character are concatenated to the internal buffer. Data from the last “Code 39” symbol
without a SPACE is added to the buffer as well, and the entire buffer will be output.
Pharmaceutical
This is a numeric (0-9) fixed length barcode used by Italian pharmacies. It is also referred to
as Code 32 Pharmacode and is a form of Code 39.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays screens in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 0 to 48.
D.5.3
Trioptic Code
Note: “Trioptic Code” and “Full ASCII” should not be enabled simultaneously. The scanner does not automatically discriminate between these two symbologies.
Enable
Trioptic Code symbols always contain six characters. Setting this parameter to on allows
this type of symbology to be recognized.
D-22
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Code 128
D.5.4
Code 128
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 128”.
ISBT Concatenation
These codes are not concatenated by default. You need to set this parameter to on to send
concatenated code.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays screens in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 0 to 80.
D.5.5
EAN 13
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 13”.
Check Digit Strip
If you enable this parameter, a check digit is stripped from the decoded bar code data.
Supplements 2 and Supplements 5
Supplements are additions to EAN/UPC codes. These addendums can be 2 or 5 characters in
length. Usually, data from an addendum is a suffix to the main symbol output data.
Mandatory Enabled
When this parameter is set to on, the imager does not accept the main bar code without a
supplement.
Supplements Separator
A Supplements Separator is a space that is added between the EAN 13 bar code and the
Supplement code/Addenda.
ISBN Translate
When this parameter (International Standard Book Number) is enabled, the first 3 characters
(‘978’) are ignored and the checksum (0.9, ‘X’) is calculated on the remaining characters.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
D-23
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
EAN 8
D.5.6
EAN 8
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 8”.
Check Digit Strip
If you enable this parameter, a check digit is stripped from the decoded bar code data.
Supplements 2 and Supplements 5
Supplements are additions to EAN/UPC codes. These addendums can be 2 or 5 characters in
length. Usually, data from an addendum is a suffix to the main symbol output data.
Mandatory Enabled
When this parameter is set to on, the imager does not accept the main bar code without a
supplement.
Supplements Separator
Supplements Separator is a space that is added between the EAN 8 bar code and the Supplement code/Addenda.
D.5.7
UPC-A
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “UPC-A”.
Check Digit Strip
If you enable this parameter, a check digit, if present, is stripped from the decoded bar code
data.
Number System
If this parameter is enabled, the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded bar
code data.
Supplements 2 and Supplements 5
Supplements are additions to EAN/UPC codes. These addendums can be 2 or 5 characters in
length. Usually, data from an addendum is a suffix to the main symbol output data.
D-24
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
UPC-E Settings
Mandatory Enabled
When this parameter is set to on, the imager does not accept the main bar code without a
supplement.
Supplements Separator
Supplements Separator is a space that is added between the UPC-A bar code and the Supplement code/Addenda.
D.5.8
UPC-E Settings
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “UPC E”.
Enabled UPC-E1
Set this parameter to on to allow “UPC-E1” (zero suppressed) bar code scans.
Expand
This parameter expands the UPC-E code to a 12 digit UPC-A format.
Check Digit Strip
If you enable this parameter, a check digit is stripped from the decoded bar code data.
Number System
If this parameter is enabled, the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded bar
code data.
Supplements 2 and Supplements 5
Supplements are additions to EAN/UPC codes. These addendums can be 2 or 5 characters in
length. Usually, data from an addendum is a suffix to the main symbol output data.
Mandatory Enabled
When this parameter is set to on, the imager does not accept the main bar code without a
supplement.
Supplements Separator
Supplements Separator is a space that is added between the UPC-E bar code and the Supplement code/Addenda.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
D-25
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
UPC/EAN Shared Settings
D.5.9
UPC/EAN Shared Settings
Extended Coupon Code
This parameter specifies whether or not the imager will read only UPC-A/EAN-13 bar
codes that have addenda.
Note: The 2 or 5 digit addenda must be turned on/off, depending on the desired behavior.
D.5.10 Code 93
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 93”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 0 to 80.
D.5.11 Codabar
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Codabar”.
Start/Stop Strip
Codabar can use the following sets of characters as start and stop characters:
a, b, c, d
A, B, C, D
a, b, c, d, /, t, n, *, e
DC1, DC2, DC3, DC4
Setting this parameter to on strips the start and stop characters from this bar code.
Check Char
When this parameter is enabled, before data is output, the “Codabar” symbol integrity is verified based on a parity character that must be present in the code. If the parity character is not
part of the code, the code is not output. Keep in mind the parity character may not be part of
your output setup; in this case, this parameter should be turned off.
D-26
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
MSI Plessey
Check Char Strip
If you enable this parameter, a check character is stripped from the decoded bar code data.
Concatenation
“Codabar” supports symbol concatenation. When Concatenation is set to on, Codabar uses a
‘D’ stop character to indicate that data from that symbol should be concatenated with data
from the adjacent symbol with a ‘D’ start character.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 2 to 60.
D.5.12 MSI Plessey
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable MSI.
Enable Plessey
Set this parameter to on to enable Plessey.
Check Char
When this parameter is set to on, the integrity of a “MSI Plessey” symbol is checked to
ensure that it complies with specified algorithms.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 4 to 48.
Plessey Minimum and Plessey Maximum Length
These parameters apply to Plessey bar codes.The length of a code refers to the number of
characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on
these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 4 to 48.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
D-27
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Code 11
D.5.13 Code 11
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 11”.
Check Digits
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can choose One Check
Digit or Two check digits.
If this parameter is set to One Check Digit, it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit. If
it is set to Two Check Digits, it is assumed that the last two digits are check digits.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 80.
D.5.14 Interleaved 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Interleaved 2 of 5”.
Check Char
When this parameter is set to on, the integrity of a “Interleaved 2 of 5” symbol is checked to
ensure that it complies with specified algorithms.
Check Char Strip
If you enable this parameter, a check character is stripped from the decoded bar code data.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 2 to 80.
D.5.15 Matrix 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Matrix 2 of 5”.
D-28
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
IATA 2 of 5
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 80.
D.5.16 IATA 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “IATA 2 of 5”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 48.
D.5.17 Discrete 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Discrete 2 of 5”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 48.
D.5.18 Telepen
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Telepen”.
Enable AIM Output
If you set Enable AIM Output to on, the imager reads symbols with start/stop pattern 1 and
decodes them as standard full ASCII (start/stop pattern 1). If you set this parameter to off,
the imager reads symbols with start/stop pattern 1 and decodes them as compressed numeric
with optional full ASCII (start/stop pattern 2).
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
D-29
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
GS1 DataBar
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 60.
D.5.19 GS1 DataBar
GS1 DataBar
Set this parameter to on to enable the imager to read “GS1 Databar” symbols.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 4 to 74.
D.5.20 Posi Code (Reduced Space Symbology)
Enable
Setting this parameter to on enables “Posi Code” scanning capability.
Enable Limited A and Enable Limited B
“Posi Code” is a “position” based symbology. A position based symbology de-couples the
widths of the bars from their positions. The centers of the bars are specified to be laid out on
a grid of equally spaced parallel lines. The distance between these grid lines is called the Gdimension and is analogous to the X-dimension of conventional bar codes.
There are two variations of this code: Posi Code A, and Posi Code B.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 2 to 80.
D.5.21 Composite
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Composite” bar codes.
D-30
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
TLC-39
Important: To successfully read this type of bar code, the two types of symbologies
included in a composite bar code must be enabled.
D.5.22 TLC-39
This composite component integrates MicroPDF417 with the linear code.
Enabled
Setting this parameter to on enables this parameter.
D.5.23 2D PDF-417
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “2D PDF-417”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 2750.
D.5.24 2D Micro PDF-417
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “2D Micro PDF-417”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 366.
D.5.25 Code 16K
The “Code 16K” bar code is a multiple-row bar code that can encode the full ASCII character set below ASCII 128. It uses existing UPC and Code 128 character set patterns. Up to 77
full ASCII characters or 154 numeric characters can be encoded into 2 to 16 rows. Each row
is divided by a separator bar. The top and bottom of the symbol also have separator bars that
extend to the ends of the minimum quiet zones.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
D-31
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Code 49
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 16K”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 160.
D.5.26 Code 49
The “Code 49” bar code is a multiple-row bar code that can encode the full ASCII character
set below ASCII 128. Up to 49 alphanumeric characters or 81 numeric characters can be
encoded into two to eight rows. Each row is divided by a separator bar. The top and bottom
of the symbol also have separator bars that extend to the ends of the minimum quiet zones.
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 49”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 81.
D.5.27 Codablock
Enable
Set this parameter to on to enable “Codablock”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 2048.
D.5.28 2D Data Matrix
Enable
Set this parameter to on to enable “2D Data Matrix”.
D-32
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
2D QR Code
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 1500.
D.5.29 2D QR Code
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “2D QR Code”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 3500.
D.5.30 2D Maxicode
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “2D Maxicode”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 150.
D.5.31 2D Aztec
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “2D Aztec”.
Aztec Runes
Aztec Runes, the smallest type of Aztec Code symbol, has the ability to encode a very short
license plate message.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 3750.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
D-33
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Postal: PlaNET
D.5.32 Postal: PlaNET
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: PlaNET”.
Check Digit Strip
If you enable this parameter, a check digit is stripped from the decoded bar code data.
D.5.33 Postal: PostNET
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: PostNET”.
Check Digit Strip
If you enable this parameter, a check digit is stripped from the decoded bar code data.
D.5.34 Postal: Australian
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Australian”.
D.5.35 Postal: Canadian
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Canadian”.
D.5.36 Postal: China
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: China”.
D.5.37 Postal: Japanese
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Japanese”.
D-34
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Postal: Kix
D.5.38 Postal: Kix
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Kix”.
D.5.39 Postal: Korean
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Korean”.
D.5.40 Postal: Royal
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Royal”.
D.5.41 VeriCode®
Enabled
VeriCode is a 2D omni-directional symbol. To read this symbol, set this parameter to on.
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
D-35
INDEX
A
Accepted Start Char 21
accessories
desktop docking station 156
Ethernet adaptor cable 160
hand strap 145
quad docking station 162
ActiveSync, setting up 23
Adaptor
Cable/Dongle Micro-USB to Ethernet
(Model No. PX3052) 152
Cable Micro-USB to USB A Receptacle
(Model No. PX3058) 152
Micro-USB with DC Jack (Model No.
3054) 154
RS-232 (Model No. PX3050) 152
adaptor cable
USB-Ethernet 160
Addendum 25
Addendum Add-on 2 25
Addendum Add-on 5 25
Aim Duration D-2, D-20
aiming dot, duration of C-1
All
Predefined preset D-2
ALT Key 32
appearance (display colour scheme) 79
appending to bar codes
characters 138
arrow keys
moving the cursor 32
ASCII
Full Ascii 20
audio indicators
beep conditions 38
volume adjustment 39
B
backlight
display 78
intensity 36
keyboard 36
backup battery 11
backup profile, creating (Total Recall) 116
backup profile, restoring (Total Recall) 119
backup profile, viewing (Total Recall) 119
Bad Scan Beep 138
bar code
appending to 138
Decoding symbology predefined
presets D-2
displaying type of bar code 138
Options tab 137
parameters 135
prefix character 8
stripping characters 8
symbologies
Codabar 13, 26, B-26
Code 11 28, B-28
Code 128 8
Code 93 12, B-26
Discrete 2 of 5 16, 30, B-29
EAN 13 9, 23
EAN 8 9, 23
IATA 2 of 5 B-29
Interleaved 2 of 5 15, 29, B-28
Matrix 2 of 5 30, B-28
MSI Plessey 13, 27, B-27
UPC A 10, 24, B-24
UPC E 10, 24, B-25
Translation tab 140
bar code reader
integrated scanner, operation of 164
batteries
a description of 151
backup 11
charging 11
pinouts A-2
battery
capacity dialog box 93
charging 29
gauge 40
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
I
Index
installing 11, 28
power saving suspend dialog box 93
removing 28
run time 41
storing 42
swap time 29
beeper
beep conditions 38
volume adjustment 39
Bi-Direction Redundancy 4
BKSP (DEL Key) 32
Bluetooth devices, pairing 43, 107
Bluetooth radio
ISM band 102
radio configuration 102
Bluetooth setup 102
GPRS setup 111
peripherals 166
Bluetooth specs 172
Bright For (backlight) 79
C
cable diagrams A-1
calibrating (touchscreen) 36, 97
changing password (Start Menu security)
60
characters
prefix 8
stripping 8
charger
descriptions of 30
chargers 155
desktop docking station 156
installing at a site 156
operator controls 156
charging (main battery) 11
Check Digit Algorithm (MSI Plessey) 14
Check Digits (MSI Plessey) 14
Check Digit Strip B-23
Check Digit Verification 6, 7, 21, 23, 27,
28, 29, 30
Check Digit Verification (Codabar) 27
Check Digit Verification (I 2 of 5) 15
cleaning hand-held 47
Click Data (scanner double-click) 138
Click Time (scanner double-click) 137
CLSI Editing 13
CLSI Library System 26
Codabar 26, B-26
II
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Codabar 13
Codablock B-32
Code Page
Default Local ASCII 139
ISO-8859-1 Latin 1) 139
code page (Data Handling) 139
Code 11 28, B-28
Code 128 8, 21
Code 128 Emulation C-18, 33
Code 16K B-31
Code 32, Convert To 6
Code 32 Prefix 6
Code 39 5, 20
Code 49 B-32
Code 93 12, B-26
Code 93 12
cold reset 24
Cold Reset (Shutdown menu) 66
Command Prompt 61
communication
Ethernet connection (desktop dock)
160
Ethernet connection (quad dock) 163
NEO to PC 160
Composite B-30
Composite 17, 32
Concatenation B-22, B-27
configuring IEEE 802.11 radio 12
Continuous Scan Mode 19
Control Panel
Predefined presets D-2
control panel
accessing 73
basic setup 78
Display Properties 78
icons 74
keyboard properties 80
power management properties 92
stylus properties 96
Conv. UPC-E To UPC-A 11
Conv. UPC-E1 To UPC-A 11
Convert To Code 32 6
Convert To EAN 13 15, 24
Convert To UPC -A 25
CTRL Key 32
Custom preset D-1
cycle tasks 63
Index
D
Data Handling (code page) 139
Data Matrix, 2D B-32
data transfer, PC to NEO 23
debug (error handling) 131
decoded (internal) scanner parameters 1
decoded (ISCP) parameters 18
Decode Performance 7, 9
Decode Performance Level 7, 9
Default Local ASCII (Code Page) 139
DEL (BKSP) Key 32
Delete Char Set ECIs 5
Demo
Imager 61
Scanner 61
Signature 61
desktop connection, remote 73
desktop docking station (WA4002) 156
dialog box, using 66
Diff Read Timeout 20
Dim For (backlight) 79
Discrete 2 of 5 16, 30, B-29
Discrete 2 of 5 16
dismounting partitions 123
display
appearance (colour scheme) 79
backlight 78
backlight, adjusting 36
Display Properties 78
Display Properties 78
docking device icons 41
docking station
uploading data using 43
docking stations 155
desktop docking station 156
installation at site 156
operator controls 156
quad dock 162
Dot Time C-1
double-click
appending characters to a decoded
bar code 138
scanner trigger 137
Double-Click, Manage Triggers menu 99
Double-Tap (stylus settings) 97
Dr. Debug 131
E
EAN 13 9, 23
EAN 8 9, 23
EAN-8 Zero Extend 9
ECI Decoder 5
Enable AIM Output (Telepen) B-29
Enable Bookland (UPC-EAN) 11
Enable CC-AB 17, 32
Enable CC-C 32
Enable Plessy 27
Enable TLC-39 17, 32
Error Reporting 131
ESC Key 33
EV15 1D imager scanner specifications
174
F
Field Size 7
FNC1 Conversion 22
formatting
entire memory card 121
partitions 123
Full Ascii 20
Full ASCII (decoded scanner) 7
Function Keys
accessing 33
G
Glossy surface
Predefined preset D-3
Good Scan Beep 138
GPRS (Bluetooth) 111
Group, preset D-1
GS1 DataBar B-30
GS1 DataBar B-15, B-31
GS1-128 21
GS1-128 GS1 US 8
GS1-128 Identifier 22
GTIN Compliant 22, 25
H
hand strap 145
headsets, pairing (Bluetooth) 43, 107
HHP 5000 imager specs 174
I
IATA 2 of 5 B-29
Identifier, Default preset group (imaging
software) D-2
IEEE radio, configuring 12
Imager
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
III
Index
EV15 specifications 174
HHP 5000 specs 174
imager options 164
Imager Settings 133
indicators
battery gauge 40
docking devices 41
LED functions 37
modifier keys 40
onscreen 39
scanner message 165
security level 41
taskbar 55
802.11radio signal quality 41
Input Panel (control panel) 75
integrated scanner option 164
Intensity, Keyboard Backlight 82
Intensity (backlight) 79
Interleaved 2 of 5 15, 29, B-28
Internet Explorer 61
ISBN Conversion B-23
ISBN Conversion 23
ISBT Concat Any Pair 22
ISBT Concatenation B-23
ISBT Concat Transmit 22
ISBT 128 8, 22
ISM band, Bluetooth radio 102
ISO-8859-1 Latin 1 (code page) 139
K
keyboard
alpha keyboard 34
key repeat 80, 82
one shot mode 83
36-key keyboard 34
keyboard backlight 36
keyboard keys 31
ALT 32
arrow keys 32
BKSP 32
CTRL 32
DEL 32
ESC 33
Macro keys 34
macro keys 84
modifiers 31
navigating using the keyboard 51
one shot mode 83
SCAN 33
IV
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
SHIFT 32
SPACE 32
TAB 33
Keyboard Properties 80, 82
backlight 82
one shot mode 83
Key Repeat tab 80
keys
alpha keys, 36-key keyboard 34
L
Laser On Time 1, 19
LED
functions 37
Length Mode 27, 29, 31
Length Restriction (bar code scanning)
7
Linear
Predefined preset D-2
Linear and PDF
Predefined preset D-3
Linear Decode 12
Linear Security Level 3
Linear Transmission only (Decoded
Composite) 32, 33
Low light
Predefined preset D-3
Low light near
Predefined preset D-4
Low power
Predefined preset D-3
Low Power Timeout 2, 19
L1, Set Length 6
L2, Set Length 6
M
Macro keys 34
executing a macro 85
Macros menu, accessing 84
recording and saving 84
maintenance (of hand-held) 47
Manage Triggers 98
Mandatory Enabled B-23
Matrix
Predefined preset D-3
Matrix 2 of 5 30, B-28
Maximum Length B-22, B-23
memory card
creating partitions 122
Index
formatting entire 121
formatting partition 123
messages
Scan Indicator 138
scanner warning message 138
Scan Result 138
Micro PDF-417 B-31
Micro PDF-417 C-17, 33
Micro-SD Card, inserting 46
Microsoft® ActiveSync® 23
Microsoft® Vista® 23
Micro-USB with DC Jack Adaptor (Model
No. 3054) 154
Minimum Cancel Time 2, 19
Minimum Length B-22, B-23
Minimum Length 21, 23, 26, 28, 30, 31
Mobile Device Center (Windows), setting
up 24
modifier keys 31
locking 31
One Shot Mode 83
unlocking 31
Motion
Predefined preset D-4
mounting partitions 124
MSI Plessey 13, 27, B-27
N
NOTIS Editing 13
Number System B-24
O
one dimensional internal scanner 165
One Shot Mode 83
ON For 82
Options tab (bar codes) 137
P
pairing Bluetooth devices 43, 107
Parameter Scanning 3, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23,
26, 28, 29, 30, 31
partitions
creating 122
deleting 123
dismounting 123
formatting 123
management 123
mounting 124
PC, connecting NEO to 160
PDF and linear
Predefined preset D-3
PDF-417 C-17, 33
Pharmaceutical B-22
pinouts A-1
Plessey Maximum Length B-27
Plessey Minimum Length B-27
Plessy Transmit Check Digit 28
port pinouts A-1
Posi Code B-30
Postal
Australian B-34
Canadian B-34
China B-34
Japanese B-34
Kix B-35
Korean B-35
PlaNET B-34
PostNET B-34
Predefined preset D-3
Royal B-35
Power button 11, 30
powering up 11
Power Management Properties 92
battery capacity 93
suspend, power saving 93
Power Mode Decoded (Internal)
Scanner C-2
Power Source 93
Predefined preset D-1
All D-2
Glossy surface D-3
Linear D-2
Linear and PDF D-3
Low light D-3
Low light near D-4
Low power D-3
Matrix D-3
Motion D-4
Postal D-3
Predefined Presets, imaging software D-2
Prefix 5
Prefix Char 8
Preset (imaging software)
Custom D-1
Group D-1
Predefined D-1
Preset Group, Default identifier (imaging
software) D-2
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
V
Index
profile, creating backup 116
profile, restoring backup 119
profile, viewing backup 119
Programs
Command Prompt 61
Internet Explorer 61
Remote Desktop Connection 61
Windows Explorer 61
punctuation marks, accessing (SHIFT
Key) 32
Q
quad dock (WA4204-G2) 162
R
radio
Bluetooth 102
Bluetooth specs 172
configuring 12
specifications 171
802.11signal quality 41
radio specifications 171
Raster Expand Rate (2D) C-4
Raster Height (2D) C-4
Reading Range 20, 22, 26, 29
recalibrating (touchscreen) 36, 97
remote connect 73
Remote Desktop Connection 61
Repeat Delay (between key repeats) 80
Repeat Rate (of key repeats) 81
Repeat tab (key repeat settings) 80
Resetting
cold reset 24
warm reset 24
RS-232 Adaptor (Model No. PX3050) 152
Run (Start Menu) 65
S
Same Read Timeout 20
Same Read Validate 19
Scan Data Format 5
Scan Indicator 138
SCAN Key 33
Scan Log File 139
Scan Mode 2
scanner
decoded (internal) 1
decoded (ISCP) 18
module (SE955) specifications 173
VI
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
one dimensional (1D) internal scanner
165
options 164
techniques (scanning) 165
troubleshooting tips 166
scanning
Aim Duration D-2, D-20
aiming (target) dot duration C-1
appending characters 138
Bad Scan Beep 138
Bi-Direction Redundancy 4
Check Digit Algorithm (MSI Plessey)
14
Check Digits (MSI Plessey) 14
Check Digit Verification 6
Check Digit Verification (I 2 of 5) 15
Click Data (appending data) 138
Click Time 137
CLSI Editing 13
Codabar 13
Code 128 8, 21
Code 128 Emulation C-18
Code 32 Prefix 6
Code 39 5, 20
Code 93 12
Composite 17, 32
Conv. UPC-E To UPC-A 11
Conv. UPC-E1 To UPC-A 11
Convert To Code 32 6
Convert To EAN 13 15
Data Handling (code page) 139
Decode Perf. Level 7, 9
Decode Performance 7, 9
Delete Char Set ECIs 5
Discrete 2 of 5 16
Dot Time C-1
double-click 137
EAN-8 Zero Extend 9
ECI Decoder 5
Enable Bookland 11
Enable CC-AB 17, 32
Enable CC-C 32
Enable TLC-39 17, 32
Full ASCII 7
Good Scan Beep 138
laser duration 1
Laser On Time 1, 19
Linear Decode 12
Linear Security Level 3
Index
Linear Transmission only (Decoded
Composite) 32, 33
Low Power Timeout 2
Micro PDF-417 C-17
Minimum Cancel Time 2
NOTIS Editing 13
Options tab 137
Parameter Scanning 3
PDF-417 C-17
Prefix 5
prefix character 8
removing characters 8
Scan Data Format 5
Scan Indicator 138
Scan Log File 139
Scan Mode 2
Scan Result 138
Scan Result Time 138
Security Level 12
Security Level (TLC-39) 33
Set Length L1 6
Set Length L2 6
Suffix 5
Supp. Redundancy 11
Supplementals 11
symbologies 135
target (aiming) dot duration C-1
Translations tab 140
Transmit Check Digit 7
Transmit Check Digit (I 2 of 5) 15
Transmit Check Digit (MSI Plessey)
14
Transmit Code 1D Char 4
Trioptic Code, Enable B-22
Trioptic Code 39, Enable 5
UPC-A Check Digit 10
UPC-A Preamble 10
UPC-EANI 11
UPC-EAN Shared Settings 25
UPC-EAN Shared Settings B-26
UPC-E Check Digit 10
UPC-E Preamble 10
UPC-E1 Check Digit 10
UPC-E1 Preamble 10
1D internal 165
2D UPC Half Block Stitching 12
Scanning Mode (2D) C-4
Scan Result 138
Scan Result Time 138
screen
stylus, using to navigate 51
touch pen, using 51
Windows CE, navigating 51
Security Level 12
Security Level (TLC-39) 33
security level icon 41
Security Settings 59
changing password 60
configuring taskbar 60
level 59
Supervisor 59
Teklogix 59
User 59
Set Length L1 6
Set Length L2 6
Settings
Control Panel 64
Network and Dial-up connections 64
Run 64
Taskbar and Start Menu 64
SE955 scanner specifications 173
SHIFT Key 32
Shutdown
Cold Reset 66
Suspend 66
Warm Reset 66
Shutdown (Start Menu) 65
signal quality, 802.11 41
SIM card, inserting 46
SIP (Soft Input Panel 75
Soft Input Panel (SIP) 75
Soft Scan Timeout 139
SPACE Key 32
specifications
SE955 scanner 173
802.11b/g WLAN radio 171
Start/Stop Transmit 20, 26
Start Menu 58
cycle tasks 63
desktop 59
programs 61
Run 65
Security 59
Settings 64
Shutdown 65
system tray 62
task manager 63
Strip Leading 8
Strip Trailing 8
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
VII
Index
stylus (touch pen), using 51
Stylus Properties 96
Double-tap (stylus sensitivity) 97
Suffix 5
Supervisor security level 59
Supp. Redundancy (Code 128) 11
Supplementals (UPC-EAN) 11
Supplements Separator B-23
Supplements 2 B-23
Supplements 5 B-23
Surface
Glossy D-3
Suspend (Shutdown menu) 66
Suspend Timeout 94
swap time (for battery) 29
symbologies, bar code 135
system tray 62
Transmit Check Digit 21, 23, 24, 27, 28,
29, 30
Transmit Check Digit (I 2 of 5) 15
Transmit Check Digit (MSI Plessey) 14
Transmit Code 1D Char 4
Transmit Number System 24, 25
trigger mappings 98
Trigger-Press Type, Manage Triggers
menu 101
triggers, configuring 98
Trioptic Code, Enable B-22
Trioptic Code 39, Enable 5
troubleshooting tips (scanning) 166
TweakIT 125
Advanced Services 128
Radio Features 128
T
UPC A 10, 24, B-24
UPC-A Check Digit 10
UPC-A Preamble 10
UPC E 10, 24, B-25
UPC-EAN 11
UPC-EAN Shared Settings B-26
UPC-EAN Shared Settings 25
UPC-E Check Digit 10
UPC-E Preamble 10
UPC-E1 Check Digit 10
UPC-E1 Preamble 10
UPC Half Block Stitching, 2D 12
USB-Ethernet adaptor cable (WA4010)
160
User security level 59
TAB Key 33
target dot, duration of C-1
taskbar
customizing 56
onscreen indicators
battery gauge 40
docking devices 41
modifier keys 40
security level 41
802.11 radio signal quality 41
using 55
task manager 63
Teklogix Imagers applet D-1
Teklogix Imagers Settings 133
Teklogix security level 59
TekTerm application 73
Telepen B-29
Telepen 31
TLC-39 B-31
Total Recall
backup profile, creating 116
backup profile, restoring 119
view profile 119
touch pen, using 51
touchscreen
recalibration 36, 97
stylus, using 51
touch pen, using 51
touchscreen, disabling and enabling 97
Translations parameters (bar codes) 140
VIII
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
U
W
warm reset 24
Warm Reset (Shutdown menu) 66
warnings 138
Wi-Fi Configuration 13
Windows® Start Menu See Start Menu 58
Windows CE
dialog box 66
files, folders, & programs, working
with 52
Windows CE, navigating in 51
Windows Explorer 61
Windows Mobile Device Center, setting up
24
Index
1D internal scanner 165
2D Aztec B-33
2D Data Matrix B-32
2D Maxicode B-33
2D PDF-417 B-31
2D QR Code B-33
2D Raster Expand Rate C-4
2D UPC Half Block Stitching 12
36-key keyboard
alpha keys, accessing 34
uppercase letters, creating 35
802.11b/g radio specifications 171
802.11 radio, configuring 12
Psion Teklogix NEO Hand-Held Computer User Manual
IX
">